Deutsch
EnglishCONTROLS for your BMW 2 Series 2021-2025
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Dashboard
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
Additional information:
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1
Power windows 86
Unlocking
Locking
2
3
Exterior mirror adjustment button 102
Seating comfort features
Memory function 104
5
Lights
Light switch 146
4
Central locking system 82
Exterior lights off
Daytime driving lights 149
30
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Parking lights 147
Cruise Control: store the speed
Speed Limit Assistant: accept
suggested speed 196
Automatic headlight control 147
Adaptive lighting functions 149
Continuing cruise control
Automatic High Beam Assistant
145
Interrupting Cruise Control
Low beams 147
Active Cruise Control: increase
distance
Instrument lighting 150
Right roadside parking light 147
Left roadside parking light 147
Active Cruise Control: reduce dis-
tance
Cruise Control rocker switch
9
Instrument cluster 125
10 Steering wheel buttons, right
Displaying menu bar in instru-
6
Turn signal lever
Turn signal 144
ment cluster 125
High beams, headlight flasher
144
Volume, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Automatic High Beam Assistant
145
Voice activation system 51
Trip data 138
G-Meter 140
Selecting menu contents in instru-
ment cluster 125
Changing the station/track, see
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Entertainment, Communication 6
7
Shift paddles 117
Steering wheel buttons, left
Manual Speed Limiter 184
8
Telephone, see Owner's Manual
for Navigation, Entertainment and
Communication 6
Depending on the equipment:
Cruise Control on/off 186
Thumbwheel for selecting con-
figuration menus for instrument
cluster and Head-up display 125
Using infotainment selection lists
in the instrument cluster 134
Depending on the equipment:
Active Cruise Control on/off 189
11 Wiper lever
31
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Wipers 151
13
Steering wheel heating 104
Rain sensor 152
14 Adjusting the steering wheel 104
15
Unlocking the hood 293
Cleaning the windshield 153
Horn, entire surface
16
Opening and closing cargo area
76
12
17 Fold-out compartment 239
In the vicinity of the center console
1
Control display 47
Ventilation 228
Rear window defroster 227
2
3
Hazard warning system 308
Radio/multimedia, see Owner's Manual for
Navigation, Entertainment, and Communi-
cation 6
Climate control 220
Defrost function 227
Adjusting the volume
32
Dashboard
CONTROLS
Station/title forward
Station/title back
8
9
Turning drive-ready state on/off
112
Auto Start/Stop function 112
Parking assistance systems 199
Panorama view 206
4
5
6
Button for glove compartment 239
Controller with buttons 48
Automatic Hold 122
Parking brake 121
Dynamic Stability Control 179
7
Driving Experience Control 119
SPORT drive mode
10 Selector lever 114
COMFORT drive mode
ECO PRO drive mode
33
Dashboard
CONTROLS
In the vicinity of the headliner
1
Emergency Call, SOS 310
4
5
Reading lights 150
Interior lights 150
2
3
Operating the electric glass sun-
roof 88
Indicator light, front passenger
airbag 157
34
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Sensors of the vehicle
Vehicle features and options Cameras
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
Front camera
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Overview
Depending on the equipment, the following
cameras and sensors are installed in the vehi-
cle:
The front camera is located in the radiator
grille.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Camera behind the windshield
Camera behind the windshield.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The camera behind the windshield is located
near the interior mirror.
35
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
When the camera field of view is covered,
for instance by a fogged up windshield or
labels.
Top view cameras
▷
▷
▷
▷
If the camera lens is dirty or damaged.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
With open doors or open cargo area.
When driving toward bright lights or strong
reflections, e.g., because of a setting sun.
▷
▷
When it is dark outside.
The camera has overheated due to exces-
sive temperatures and temporarily turned
off.
One exterior mirror camera is located at the
bottom of each exterior mirror housing.
▷
During calibration of the camera immedi-
ately after vehicle delivery.
Rearview camera
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors
Safety information
Warning
The rearview camera is located in the handle
strip on the rear of the vehicle.
The vehicle radar sensors and thus also the
driver assistance systems can be impaired by
external influences, e.g., interference. There
is a risk of accident. Watch the surrounding
traffic situation closely, be ready to take over
steering and braking at any time, and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Functional requirement of the
cameras
The areas of the cameras are clean and clear.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 316.
Vehicle care, refer to page 317.
System limits of the cameras
The function of the cameras can be limited or
may indicate something wrong, for instance in
the following situations:
▷
▷
In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snowfall.
On steep hills, in steep depressions or in
tight curves.
36
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
If sensors are covered such as by labels,
films or a license-plate carrier.
Front radar sensor
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
If the radiation range of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by protruding cargo.
When the field of view of the sensors is cov-
ered, e.g., by garage walls, hedges, snow
hills, vehicles or trailers.
▷
▷
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
The front radar sensor is located in the front
bumper.
On steep hilltops or in sharp dips in the
road.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
Radar sensors, side, rear
Ultrasonic sensors
Ultrasonic sensors, front
The radar sensors are located on the side in
the rear bumper.
Functional requirement of the radar
sensors
The areas of the radar sensors are clean and
clear.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the front bumper.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 316.
Vehicle care, refer to page 317.
System limits of the radar sensors
The function of the radar sensors may be re-
stricted or not available, for instance in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
▷
In case of dirty sensors.
In case of iced-up sensors.
37
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
If the sensors are dirty or covered, e.g., by
stickers.
Ultrasonic sensors, rear
If the sensor is not aligned correctly, for in-
stance due to parking damage.
After improper paint work on the vehicle in
the area of the sensors.
▷
▷
For small children and animals.
For persons with certain clothing, for in-
stance jacket.
▷
▷
With obstacles and persons at the edge of
the lane.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located in the rear bumper.
In case of external interference with the
ultrasonics, for instance from passing ve-
hicles, loud machines or other ultrasonic
sources.
Ultrasonic sensors, side
▷
▷
Under certain weather conditions, e.g., high
moisture, wet conditions, snowfall, cold, ex-
treme heat, or strong wind.
With tow bars and trailer hitches of other
vehicles.
▷
▷
▷
With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
With moving objects.
With elevated, protruding objects such as
ledges.
The ultrasonic sensors of the parking assis-
tance systems are located on the side in the
front and rear bumpers.
▷
▷
With objects with corners, edges, and
smooth surfaces.
In the case of objects with fine surfaces or
structures, e.g., wire mesh fences.
Functional requirement of the
ultrasonic sensors
The areas of the ultrasonic sensors are clean
and clear.
▷
▷
For objects with porous surfaces.
With small and low objects, for instance
boxes.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Low objects already displayed, for instance
curbs, can be outside of the detection
ranges of the sensors.
▷
▷
Washing the vehicle, refer to page 316.
Vehicle care, refer to page 317.
With soft obstacles or obstacles covered in
foam material.
System limits of the ultrasonic
sensors
The detection of objects with ultrasonic meas-
urements can run into physical limits, e.g., in
the following situations:
▷
▷
▷
With plants and bushes.
In automatic car washes.
In the event of uneven floors, e.g. speed
bumps.
38
Sensors of the vehicle
CONTROLS
▷
▷
If there are large amounts of exhaust gas.
Cargo that extends beyond the perimeter of
the vehicle is not taken into account by the
ultrasonic sensors.
If applicable, a Check Control message will be
displayed when the system limits are reached.
39
Operating condition of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Operating condition of the vehicle
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Vehicle features and options
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Warning
General information
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Depending on the situation, the vehicle is in
one of the three states:
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
▷
▷
▷
Idle state.
Standby state.
Drive-ready state.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Idle state
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Principle
When the vehicle is in idle state, it is switched
off.
General information
The vehicle is in idle state prior to opening
from the outside and after exiting and locking.
Establishing the sleep mode
automatically
The sleep mode is established automatically
such as in the following situations:
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
After several minutes, if no operation takes
place on the vehicle.
Warning
If the charge state of the vehicle battery is
low.
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Depending on the configuration via iDrive:
one or both front doors will be opened after
driving when exiting the vehicle.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
40
Operating condition of the vehicle
CONTROLS
In some situations, the idle state is not set au-
tomatically, for instance during a phone call or
when the low beams are switched on.
Manually setting to standby
General information
Standby can be switched back on after the ve-
hicle is automatically set to idle state.
Establishing idle state when
opening the front doors
After a trip, the sleep mode can be established
by opening the front doors. For this purpose,
all passengers must exit the vehicle.
Via button on the radio
Press the button on the radio.
The control display and the in-
strument cluster illuminate.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Via start/stop button
5. "Turn off after opening door"
Press the Start/Stop button. The
control display and the instru-
ment cluster illuminate.
Establishing the sleep mode
manually
To establish idle state in the vehicle after com-
pletion of trip:
Display in the instrument cluster
Press and hold the button on
the radio until the OFF indicator
on the instrument cluster goes
out.
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. The drivetrain is
switched off and standby state
switched on.
Standby state
Drive-ready state
Principle
Principle
Turning on drive-ready state corresponds to
starting the engine.
When standby state is switched on, most func-
tions can be used while the vehicle is station-
ary. Desired settings can be adjusted.
General information
The vehicle is in the standby state after the
front doors are opened from the outside.
General information
Some vehicle functions can only be used with
the drive-ready state switched on.
41
Operating condition of the vehicle
CONTROLS
Safety information
Turning on the drive-ready state
General information
DANGER
Drive-ready state is switched on
via the Start/Stop button.
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation is
insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pene-
trate the vehicle. The exhaust gases contain
pollutants which are colorless and odorless.
In enclosed areas, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation.
Turning on the drive-ready state
1. Depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the in-
strument cluster illuminate for a varied length
of time.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
Gasoline engine
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Depending on the motorization, the full drive
power may not be available for approximately
30 seconds after starting the engine. In this
case, the vehicle will not accelerate as usual.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
Additional information:
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
Power gauge, refer to page 135.
Display in the instrument cluster
The activated drive-ready state is indicated
in the instrument cluster, depending on the
equipment, by the display of information re-
quired for driving or the READY display.
NOTICE
Repeated attempts to start the engine or re-
peated starting of the vehicle in rapid suc-
cession can cause the starter to overheat.
This also results in unburned or inadequately
burned fuel, and can cause the catalytic con-
verter to overheat. There is a risk of damage
to property. Avoid repeated starting of the
vehicle, particularly repeated starting in rapid
succession.
Turning off drive-ready state
1. Engage selector lever position P with the
vehicle stopped.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
The engine is switched off. The vehicle
switches into standby state.
42
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
BMW iDrive
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Main menu
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
General information
The main menu is divided into different areas.
Display and operating
concept
Overview
Principle
BMW iDrive is the vehicle’s display and oper-
ating concept and includes a wide range of
functions.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the functions
can be operated as follows:
1
Menu bar
2
3
4
Widgets
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Via the control display.
Status information
Climate bar, climate 220
Via the Controller.
Via the touchpad.
Via the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
Menu bar
Via the operating elements on the steering
wheel.
Menu Apps
Additional information:
Access to apps and vehicle functions. A
Instrument cluster, refer to page 125.
filter can be selected. If necessary, change the
filter to see the apps you want.
Safety information
▷
"All apps": All apps and functions are dis-
played.
Warning
▷
"Infotainment": Only infotainment apps are
displayed.
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
43
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
"Vehicle": Only vehicle adjustment func-
tions are displayed.
Status information
General information
"Recently used": The most recently used
apps are displayed.
The status field can be found in the upper area
of the control display. Status information is dis-
played in the form of icons. Depending on the
equipment and national-market version, differ-
ent icons are available.
Media menu
Access to entertainment system functions,
e.g., radio stations or external device pairing.
Telephone status information
Communication menu
Access to telephone and message function
as well as pairing and management of mobile
devices, e.g., smartphones.
Icon
Meaning
Active call.
Signal strength.
SIM card missing.
Navigation menu
Access to navigation system, destination
entry, and traffic information. Configurable
map views and other functions such as points
of interest.
Entertainment status information
Icon Meaning
USB audio.
Climate menu
The Climate menu provides access to all
climate control functions.
Bluetooth audio.
Smartphone audio.
Connected Music with Spotify.
Time shift.
Apple CarPlay© menu
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Apple CarPlay.
Apple CarPlay enables the secure use of cer-
tain functions of a compatible Apple iPhone via
iDrive.
Wi-Fi.
Apple CarPlay.
Android Auto© menu
Android Auto.
Depending on national-market version with
associated function: Access to Android Auto.
Android Auto enables the secure use of certain
functions of a compatible Android smartphone
via iDrive.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Status information messages
Icon Meaning
Widgets
Number of notifications.
Check Control message.
Suppress private information.
Widgets show real-time information and dy-
namic content such as current media or paired
smartphones. The widgets also serve as but-
tons and allow jumping to the relevant menu.
44
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Icon Meaning
Do not disturb.
Icon
Function
Confirm entry.
Message.
Shift the input area to the left
or right.
Additional information:
Entry comparison
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
When entering data from a database such as
contacts, the selection is gradually narrowed
down for each character entered, with charac-
ters being added as necessary.
Other status information
Icon Meaning
Activating/deactivating the functions
Sound output active.
Some menu items are preceded by an icon.
Selecting the menu item enables or disables
the function.
Sound output deactivated.
Activation word active.
BMW ID or driver profile.
Destination guidance active.
Go to quick access.
Icon
Meaning
Function is activated.
Function is deactivated.
Wireless charging active.
Park Distance Control: sound active.
Enabling/disabling audible feedback
For some functions, audio confirmation is
given, e.g., sounds are emitted when operating
the control display.
Park Distance Control: sound deacti-
vated.
1.
Apps menu
Input and display
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Sound"
Letters and numbers
Letters and numbers can be entered using the
controller, touchpad, control display, or voice
control, depending on vehicle equipment.
5. Select the desired setting.
Quick access
The quick link provides access to shortcuts,
certain settings, and app recommendations.
Icon
Function
Change between capital and
lower-case letters.
Enter a blank space.
Switching between languages.
Use voice control.
45
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
The function will work immediately. This
means for instance that the connection is es-
tablished when a phone number is selected.
Input
Operation
Swipe from top to bottom on the
Show
quick link. control display.
Slide the controller up.
Tap the icon on the status
bar.
Swipe from the bottom up on the
quick link. control display.
Slide the controller down.
Deleting shortcuts
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2. Press and hold the desired shortcut.
3. "Delete shortcut"
Hide
BMW Curved Display
Activating/deactivating pop-ups
For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
automatically on the control display. Some of
these pop-ups can be activated or deactivated.
Principle
The BMW Curved Display is a single-screen
display in the instrument panel that is curved
towards the driver. The BMW Curved Display
comprises the instrument cluster on the driv-
er's side and the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Pop-ups"
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the BMW
Curved Display in the Care chapter.
5. Select the desired setting.
Shortcuts
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 319.
General information
The iDrive functions can be stored on the
shortcuts and called up directly, for instance
radio stations, navigation destinations, phone
numbers and menu entries.
Overview
Storing a function
1. Select the desired function.
2. Press and hold the desired function.
3. "Add to shortcuts"
Shortcuts can only be created with an active
BMW ID or a driver profile.
1
Instrument cluster 125
Control display 47
Executing a function
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
2
2. Tap the desired shortcut.
46
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Switching the control display on/off
automatically
Control display
The control display is turned on automatically
when the vehicle is unlocked or as soon as the
control display is needed for operation.
Principle
The iDrive functions are displayed on the con-
trol display.
In certain situations, the control display is
switched off automatically, for instance if no
operation is performed on the vehicle for sev-
eral minutes.
Safety information
Warning
Switching the control display on/off
manually
1. Swipe from top to bottom on the control
display.
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable
such as mobile phones or loose objects can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Se-
cure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
2. "Screen off"
Tap the control display to turn it on again.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
Warning
2. "Vehicle"
Objects in the area in the front of the control
display can slip and damage the control dis-
play. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Do not place objects in the
area in front of the control display.
3. "Displays"
4. "Control display"
5. "Brightness at night"
6. Make the desired setting.
Depending on the light conditions, the bright-
ness control may not be clearly visible.
Overview
System limits
In the case of very high temperatures on the
control display, for instance due to intense so-
lar radiation, the brightness may be reduced
down to complete deactivation. Once the
temperature is reduced, for instance through
shade or air conditioning system, the normal
functions are restored.
Control display
47
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Operation
Controller
▷
▷
▷
Rotate the Controller to switch between
menu options, for example.
Principle
The Controller can be used to select menu
items and enter the settings. The buttons can
be used to open the menus directly.
Overview
Press the Controller to select a menu
option, for example.
Controller
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
Call up the main menu.
Slide the Controller in four directions to
switch between menus, for example.
Call up the Media/Radio menu.
Go to Phone menu.
Call up the navigation map.
Call up the destination input menu
for navigation.
Operating via the Controller
Go to previous menu.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
Call up the Options menu.
The main menu is displayed.
48
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Selecting menu items
1. Turn the Controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
2. Press the Controller.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
Selecting a widget
1. Slide the Controller in the main menu to the
right.
2. Select the first letter of the desired entry.
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired widget
is selected.
3. Press the Controller.
Operation via touchpad
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, some iDrive
functions can be operated with the controller
touchpad.
▷
Slide the Controller to the left.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
The touchpad is located on the Controller.
Touch the touchpad with your fingers. Do not
use any objects.
▷
Press the button.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Selecting functions
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Entering letters and numbers
3. "System settings"
4. "Touchpad"
Input
5. Select the desired setting.
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or num-
bers.
Entering letters and numbers
2.
: confirm entry.
▷
Enter characters as they are displayed on
the control display.
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to
page 54.
▷
Always enter associated characters such as
accents or periods so that the letter can be
clearly recognized.
Deleting an entry
▷
The set language determines what input
is possible. Where necessary, enter special
characters via the Controller.
Icon Function
Press Controller: delete a letter or num-
ber.
Additional information:
Setting the system language, refer to
page 54.
Hold the Controller down: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
49
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
You can tap on menu items and widgets.
Touch the control display with your fingers. Do
not use any objects.
Entering special characters
Function
Operation
Delete a charac- Swipe to the left on the
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon.
ter.
touchpad.
Enter a blank
space.
Swipe to the right in the
center of the touchpad.
The main menu is displayed.
Adjusting widgets
The widgets can be adjusted in the main
menu. The adjustments can only be performed
when the vehicle is stationary.
Enter a hyphen. Swipe to the right in the
upper area of the touch-
pad.
Enter an under- Swipe to the right in the
score.
lower area of the touch-
pad.
1. If necessary,
tap the icon.
2. Press and hold the widget.
3. Make the desired adjustment:
Using the map
The map in the navigation system can be
moved via the touchpad.
▷
▷
▷
Tap on the icon.
A new widget can be selected.
Tap on the icon.
Tap the map on the control display and then
continue operation using the touchpad.
The widget is deleted.
Press and hold the widget and drag to
the left or right.
Function
Operation
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate di-
rection.
The widget is moved to the desired po-
sition.
Display menu. Tap once.
Sorting apps
To resort the app icons, press and hold the de-
sired icon and move it to the desired location.
Using alphabetical lists
Alphabetical lists with more than 30 entries
permit a direct jump to letters for which an en-
try exists.
Switching between menus
A new display opens after a menu item is se-
lected.
Enter the first letter on the touchpad.
The first entry of the entered letter is displayed
in the list.
Swipe from left to right on the control display.
The current menu closes and the previous
menu is displayed.
Operation via control display
Calling up the context menu
Depending on the menu item, a context menu
with additional options can be displayed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the con-
trol display is equipped with a touchscreen.
Press and hold the desired menu item.
50
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
The first entry of the selected letter is dis-
played in the list.
▷
"General help": Go to the Integrated Own-
er's Manual.
BMW Intelligent Personal
Assistant
▷
"Add to shortcuts": define menu item as
shortcut.
Entering letters and numbers
Principle
The BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is a
personal assistant that enables natural voice
operation of various vehicle functions. The
Personal Assistant makes it easier to operate
the vehicle by providing proactive suggestions
and automating habits.
Input
1. If necessary, tap the
display.
icon or control
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting an entry
General information
Icon Function
▷
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant is avail-
able depending on national-market version.
Tap icon: delete a letter or a number.
▷
The system includes special microphones
on the driver side and the front passenger
side.
Press and hold the icon: delete all let-
ters or numbers.
▷
▷
Say the commands and numbers fluently
as well as with normal volume, emphasis,
and speed.
Using the map
The navigation map can be moved on the con-
trol display.
›...‹ identifies commands that can be spo-
ken.
Function
Operation
Move map.
Swipe in the appropriate
direction.
Functional requirements
▷
A language that is supported by the Per-
sonal Assistant must be set via iDrive.
Enlarge/shrink
map.
Drag in or out with the fin-
gers.
Setting the system language, refer to
page 54.
Display menu.
Tap once.
▷
Always say commands in the configured
system language.
Using alphabetical lists
For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
tries, the letters for which an entry exists can
be displayed in a text box.
For the full range of functions, you must acti-
vate, configure, or purchase the following func-
tions:
▷
Online speech processing, refer to
page 54.
1. Tap the letter in front of the list.
A letter box is displayed.
▷
For all settings under
2. Tap the first letter of the desired entry.
Data protection, refer to page 62.
51
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Activation word, refer to page 52.
BMW ID or a driver profile.
Preset activation word
›Hello BMW‹: The default activation word can
be activated and deactivated.
Relevant ConnectedDrive services from the
ConnectedDrive Store.
1.
Apps menu
▷
Get suggestions, refer to page 54.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
Activating the voice control system
General information
There are various methods for activating the
voice control feature:
7. ""Hello BMW""
Personal activation word
▷
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel briefly.
In addition to the preset activation word, a
personal activation word can be set up with
an active BMW ID or a driver profile. The per-
sonal activation word can also be changed or
deleted.
The microphone on the driver's side is ac-
tive.
Speaking the activation word.
The microphones on the driver's or front
passenger's side are active with the follow-
ing voice control, depending on where the
activation word was spoken.
The activation word should consist of multiple
syllables to ensure good recognition.
›Hello‹: The additional phrase is not necessary
for the activation word and does not need to
be spoken.
Then say the command. The activation word
and the command can be spoken without
pause in one sentence.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Microphone button on steering wheel
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Wake word"
1.
Press button briefly.
2. Say the command.
Activation word
General information
7. "Personal wake word"
8. "Set"
9. "Start recording"
Saying the activation word will start the Per-
sonal Assistant. The Personal Assistant lis-
tens.
Activation word from third-party providers
Depending on the national-market version,
some third-party providers provide digital voice
assistants such as Siri or Amazon Alexa.
To use Siri, the smartphone must be con-
nected via Apple CarPlay.
Supported voice assistants can be used with a
connected smartphone in the vehicle.
52
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
The activation word from connected third-
party providers can be used in addition to your
preset or personal activation word from BMW.
▷
▷
›Help‹: have tips and example commands
for voice control announced.
Additional example commands for the cur-
rent context are displayed in the widget of
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
Sample commands
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
›Call John Smith‹
5. "Additional speech assistants"
6. Select the desired setting.
›Drive me to JFK airport‹
›Play a classical music station‹
›Is my tire pressure still OK?‹
›Activate the climate control‹
›Increase the ACC distance‹
›Sport mode‹
Canceling voice control
▷
Press the button on the steering
wheel again.
Additional example commands can be dis-
played on the control display.
▷
▷
▷
›Cancel‹
Slide the Controller to the right or left.
Press the Controller.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Personal assistant"
4. "Help"
Possible commands
General information
5. "Example commands"
Commands can be used to give instructions
or ask questions, with the Personal Assistant
providing assistance.
Sample commands for the current context are
displayed in the BMW Intelligent Personal As-
sistant widget.
For example, you can call contacts, navigate
to an address, apply settings, or ask questions
about a vehicle function. Most vehicle functions
can be operated via voice commands, e.g., the
Automatic Parking Assistant.
Additional information:
Adjust widgets, refer to page 50.
Menu items
The Personal Assistant can bring up menu
items directly. Say the menu items as they are
displayed on the control display. You do not
have to follow the order of the menu items
when speaking them out loud.
Most content on the control display can be
spoken as commands, e.g., menu items or list
entries.
Help for voice control
1. Activate the voice control system.
2. ›Media‹
▷
›Voice commands‹: have possible example
commands suggested.
▷
›General information on voice control‹: have
information on the operating principle of the
voice control announced.
3. ›Presets‹
The stored stations are displayed on the
control display.
53
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
Owner's Manual via voice operation
Speaking during voice output
You can ask simple questions about vehicle
functions and the operation of the vehicle.
It is possible to answer during inquiries of the
Personal Assistant. The function can be dis-
abled if requests are often canceled uninten-
tionally, for instance due to background noise
or conversations in the vehicle.
The voice activation system and the feed-
back it provides do not replace the printed
or Integrated Owner's Manual. The function
is available depending on the national-market
version. The speech recognition and quality of
the feedback may vary.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
Example command: ›How can the passenger
airbag be deactivated?‹
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Speaking during voice output"
The Personal Assistant returns feedback.
When stationary, the section of the integrated
Owner's Manual is displayed on the control
display.
Suggestions
Settings
General information
The Personal Assistant helps with individual
suggestions.
Setting the system language
1.
Apps menu
Activating/deactivating suggestions
2. "Vehicle"
1.
Apps menu
3. "System settings"
4. "Language"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the response length
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Receive suggestions"
You can set the Personal Assistant to use
standard dialog or a short version. In case of
the short version, the announcements by the
Personal Assistant are played back in an ab-
breviated version.
Adapting suggestions
Suggestions can be adapted, for example, by
category or to output a signal tone.
1.
Apps menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Response length"
7. Select the desired setting.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. Select the desired setting.
Online speech processing
Online speech processing improves the quality
of the speech recognition and search results
54
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
for points of interest. To use the functions,
data is transmitted to a service provider via an
encrypted connection and stored locally there.
An active ConnectedDrive contract is required
for online voice processing. ConnectedDrive is
available depending on the national-market
version. Online speech processing is not avail-
able in all languages.
Adjusting the volume
Turn the volume button during the voice guid-
ance until the desired volume is set.
The volume remains constant even if the vol-
ume of other audio sources is changed.
Using the voice activation of the
smartphone
Depending on the device, a smartphone con-
nected to the vehicle can be used via voice
control.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
The device must be connected via Apple Car-
Play or Android Auto.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Online speech processing"
1. Press and hold the
button on the
Configuring the visualization
How the Personal Assistant is visualized can
be set.
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds.
The voice activation of the smartphone is
activated.
1.
Apps menu
If activation is successful, a confirmation
appears on the control display.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
2. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel to cancel voice control of the
smartphone.
5. "Personal Assistant (BMW)"
6. "Visualization"
Amazon Alexa Car Integration
Voice control from third-party
providers
Depending on vehicle equipment, third-party
voice control can be enabled by pressing and
holding the microphone button on the steering
wheel.
Principle
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is available de-
pending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version. Alexa is a digital assistant
from Amazon. With Amazon Alexa Car Integra-
tion, Alexa can be used in the vehicle. For
safety reasons, the use of some Alexa func-
tions may be restricted while driving your vehi-
cle.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Voice control"
5. "Long press"
Functional requirements
6. Select the desired setting.
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile is activated.
▷
An active Amazon account must exist.
55
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
This also applies to safety functions and
systems.
Activating Amazon Alexa Car
Integration
▷
▷
Certain noises can be detected and may
lead to problems. Keep the doors and win-
dows closed.
Amazon Alexa Car Integration is activated in
the vehicle and My BMW app if necessary.
Follow the instructions from the Amazon Alexa
app to set it up in the vehicle.
Noises from the front passenger or occu-
pants can impair the system. Avoid making
other noise in the vehicle while speaking.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
▷
▷
Major language dialects can cause prob-
lems with the speech recognition feature.
3. "Amazon Alexa"
4. Select the desired setting.
A poor data connection affects the re-
sponse time of the Personal Assistant and
search function.
After setting it up, use Amazon Alexa in the
vehicle as follows:
Say the activation word "Alexa" and the de-
sired command.
Connecting mobile devices
to the vehicle
Information about the active function is dis-
played on the control display. If the function
is restricted, reconnect Bluetooth and Wi-Fi as
necessary.
Principle
Various connection types are available for us-
ing mobile devices in the vehicle. The connec-
tion type to select depends on the mobile de-
vice and the desired function.
Automating routines
General information
The Personal Assistant can automate routines,
for instance the automatic opening of windows
in the same place. Rules are created for this
purpose, which can be activated and deacti-
vated at any time.
General information
Detailed information on the functions and con-
nection types can be found in the following
media in the Owner's Manual under the speci-
fied keyword:
Activating/deactivating routines
▷
▷
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
1.
Apps menu
Printed Owner's Manual for navigation,
communication and entertainment.
2. "All apps"
3. "Automate habits"
4. Select the desired setting.
The following information sources can also be
used:
▷
▷
Driver’s Guide app.
Driver’s Guide Web.
System limits
▷
The Personal Assistant provides informa-
tion about vehicle functions that may not be
installed in the vehicle.
56
BMW iDrive
CONTROLS
warranted, stop and use the systems and de-
vices while the vehicle is stationary.
Safety information
Warning
Overview
Operating the integrated information systems
and communication devices while driving can
distract from surrounding traffic. It is possi-
ble to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or
devices when the traffic situation allows. As
The following overview shows possible func-
tions and the suitable connection types for
them. The range of functions depends on the
vehicle equipment and the mobile device.
Function
Connection type
Icon on the con-
trol display
Making calls via the hands-free sys- Bluetooth.
tem.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Using phone functions via iDrive.
Keyword: calling via Bluetooth.
Playing music from a mobile device.
Keyword: audio.
Bluetooth audio.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection.
Calling without a mobile phone.
Personal eSIM.
Keyword: calling with the Personal
eSIM.
Keyword: Personal eSIM.
Data exchange between mobile de-
vice and vehicle.
Wi-Fi.
Keyword: vehicle WLAN.
Use Internet access via the personal Wi-Fi via personal hotspot.
hotspot.
Keyword: personal hotspot.
Using Apple CarPlay via iDrive and
via voice control.
Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Apple CarPlay preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Using Android Auto via iDrive and via Bluetooth and Wi-Fi.
voice control.
Keyword: Bluetooth connection and
Keyword: Android Auto preparation. vehicle Wi-Fi.
Playing music from a USB device.
Keyword: audio.
USB.
Keyword: USB connection.
Additional information:
USB port, refer to page 236.
57
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
Vehicle features and options
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Functional requirements
Additional information:
▷
Active ConnectedDrive contract.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
▷
The integrated SIM card in the vehicle has
been activated.
▷
▷
Cellular network reception.
BMW Remote Software
Upgrade
Consent to transmit the corresponding data
was given in the Data Protection menu.
Additional information:
Principle
Data protection, refer to page 62.
Remote Software Upgrade can be used to up-
date the entire software of the vehicle. This
makes new functions, functional enhance-
ments or quality improvements available.
Search for an upgrade
Functional requirement
Standby must be turned on to search for a
Remote Software Upgrade.
General information
BMW recommends performing the Remote
Software Upgrade as soon as it becomes
available.
Automatic search
The vehicle regularly searches for updates in
the background.
Safety information
Manual search
Warning
1.
Apps menu
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Search for upgrades"
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
58
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
completed, the information about the version
can be displayed on the control display.
Download of an upgrade
Automatic download
If available, the data for a Remote Software
Upgrade is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. No download consent is required.
This information is also available in the Con-
nectedDrive customer portal.
Displaying information
Display in the vehicle:
Via My BMW App
If an upgrade is available, information on the
new software version is displayed in the My
BMW App.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
The data for the upgrade can then be down-
loaded to a mobile device, for instance via an
existing WLAN connection.
5.
▷
Display currently installed version:
"Installed version:"
Data can then be sent from the mobile device
to the vehicle.
▷
Display new available version:
"Information on version"
This transmission method accelerates the
download of the data, for instance in areas
with limited mobile network availability.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Display in the ConnectedDrive customer portal:
1. Download the upgrade using the My BMW
App on your smartphone.
2. Follow the instructions in the My BMW App.
Installing the upgrade
3. Connect your smartphone to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio and Wi-Fi.
General information
The data transfer of the upgrade from the
mobile device to the vehicle occurs in the
background only while driving.
▷
Installation of the Remote Software Up-
grade may result in the deletion of software
changes, e.g., performance increases not
made by the manufacturer of the vehicle.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
▷
Modifications to the electrical system of the
vehicle, for instance to control units, that
have not been made by the vehicle manu-
facturer can lead to an interruption of the
installation.
Additional information:
Connecting mobile devices to the vehicle,
see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, Communication.
▷
▷
▷
The installation does not occur until the
consent was given.
Information about the version
The installation may take around 20 mi-
nutes.
General information
The information about the version contains a
description of the updates included in the Re-
mote Software Upgrade. During the download
and after the installation has been successfully
The installation cannot be terminated.
59
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The vehicle cannot be used during the in-
stallation.
Installing immediately
The upgrade can be installed immediately
when all prerequisites have been met.
The vehicle can be exited during the instal-
lation.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
Prerequisites for the installation
3. "System settings"
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. "Start upgrade now"
▷
▷
▷
The state of charge of the vehicle battery is
sufficient.
The outside temperature is above
14 ℉/-10 ℃.
6. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
Installing with timer
▷
▷
▷
The hazard warning system is turned off.
The selector lever position P is engaged.
When the trip is completed, a timer can be
used to install the upgrade automatically at
a configured time such as during the night.
A later installation may make sense to meet
functional requirements, e.g., a sufficiently
cooled down engine.
The engine is turned off and sufficiently
cooled down.
If applicable, follow the notes for further pre-
requisites on the control display.
If the prerequisites are not met such as a suffi-
cient vehicle battery charge state, the upgrade
will not be offered for installation.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "System settings"
Pay attention to an offer for installation, e.g.,
after longer trips.
4. "Remote Software Upgrade"
5. Select the desired settings.
The installation starts automatically when:
Preparing the vehicle
▷
Park the vehicle safely away from the public
road.
▷
All prerequisites for the installation have
been established correctly.
▷
Cellular network reception must be ensured
so that a fault message can be sent to the
vehicle manufacturer, for instance if the in-
stallation is terminated.
▷
All prerequisites continue to be met at the
time of installation.
The timer is turned off when the drive-ready
state is turned on.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Close the windows.
Close the glass sunroof.
Close the trunk.
Functional limitations
During the upgrade, the majority of functions is
temporarily unavailable, for instance:
Remove energy consuming devices such as
a mobile phone.
▷
▷
Hazard warning system.
▷
The vehicle key must be located in the vehi-
cle for the consent for installation.
Central locking system and, if necessary,
Comfort Access.
▷
▷
Switch off the exterior lighting.
▷
▷
Parking lights.
Horn.
Remove the devices connected to the diag-
nostic socket.
60
BMW Remote Software Upgrade
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Alarm system.
Emergency call.
Power windows.
Glass sunroof.
Checking the fuel filler flap lock.
Operate the tailgate or trunk lid.
The driver's door can be locked and unlocked
from the outside using the integrated key.
After successful upgrade
The vehicle can be used again immediately.
Booked services such as Advanced Real Time
Traffic Information or Remote Services are au-
tomatically reactivated during the next trip.
After an extended stationary period, charge
the vehicle battery with an extended drive.
Malfunction
In the event of a malfunction, follow the in-
structions on the control display or in the My
BMW App.
If the malfunction cannot be corrected, contact
an authorized service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Validity of the Owner's Manual
Production of the vehicle
At the time of production at the plant, the
printed Owner's Manual is the most current
resource.
After a software update in the vehicle
After a vehicle software update such as via Re-
mote Software Upgrade the Integrated Own-
er's Manual for the vehicle will contain the lat-
est information.
61
Personal settings
CONTROLS
Personal settings
This personal data can be permanently de-
leted using iDrive.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the following
data is deleted:
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW IDs or driver profiles.
Stored radio stations.
Stored shortcuts.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions.
Data protection
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Phone book.
Data transfer
Online data, for instance Favorites, cookies.
Office data, for instance voice memos.
Login accounts.
Principle
The vehicle offers different services, whose
use requires a data transfer to BMW or a serv-
ice provider.
Digital key.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take
up to 15 minutes. In addition, the vehicle is re-
moved from the My BMW App and Connected-
Drive customer portal so that remote functions
can no longer be used.
General information
The data transfer can be deactivated for some
services. When the data transfer is deacti-
vated, the respective service cannot be used.
Functional requirements
Settings
▷
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
The data transfer can be configured in different
stages or individually for separate services.
▷
The vehicle key must be in the vehicle.
Deleting data
1.
Apps menu
The personal data in the vehicle will be deleted
when the vehicle is reset to the factory set-
tings.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
Additional information:
5. Select the desired setting.
Resetting vehicle data, refer to page 62.
Deleting personal data in the vehicle
Reset vehicle data
Principle
All individual settings can be reset to the fac-
tory settings when the drive-ready state is
Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data such as stored radio stations.
62
Personal settings
CONTROLS
switched off. Data can only be deleted while
the vehicle is stationary. The vehicle key must
be in the vehicle.
With driver recognition, a BMW ID or driver
profile can be activated as soon as you unlock
your vehicle. For this, a vehicle key or digital
key must be linked with the BMW ID or driver
profile. After unlocking, you can change the
BMW ID or driver profile.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Reset vehicle data"
5. "Reset vehicle data"
If no BMW ID or driver profile is activated when
the vehicle is unlocked, the vehicle loads the
guest profile.
If the synchronization of settings has been en-
abled for a BMW ID in the vehicle, the personal
settings are kept in the BMW Cloud.
Functional requirements
The vehicle must be stationary to create,
change, delete, or edit a BMW ID.
Logging in the vehicle with a BMW ID and
synchronization with the BMW Cloud are only
possible when the vehicle has cellular network
reception.
BMW ID/driver profiles
Principle
In ConnectedDrive countries, the BMW ID is
the personal login for all relevant offers for the
BMW brand. The BMW ID can be used in the
vehicle to store and activate personal vehicle
settings.
Welcome window
After unlocking the vehicle, a Welcome window
is shown on the control display. The type of
the welcome depends on the following prereq-
uisites:
In non-ConnectedDrive countries, the personal
vehicle settings can be stored in driver profiles.
▷
The vehicle does not have a stored BMW
ID or driver profile:
If a vehicle is used by several people, each per-
son can use their own BMW ID in the vehicle. If
a BMW ID is activated, the settings stored for it
are applied to the vehicle.
The welcome is neutral. An option to add a
BMW ID or create a driver profile is offered.
▷
The vehicle key or the digital key has not
been assigned to a BMW ID or a driver pro-
file:
General information
The welcome is neutral. The stored BMW
IDs or the stored driver profiles are offered
for selection. Additionally, it is possible to
add a new BMW ID or create a new driver
profile.
The BMW ID must be registered once. A BMW
ID can be registered via the My BMW App, in
the ConnectedDrive Portal, or through an au-
thorized service center.
A driver profile is created in the vehicle.
▷
A BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or digital key:
Many of the settings that are stored for a BMW
ID in the vehicle can be synchronized with the
BMW Cloud. This makes these settings availa-
ble in any vehicle where the same BMW ID is
used to log in.
The welcome is personalized, the stored
settings are activated. The BMW ID or the
driver profile can be changed.
As soon as the drive-ready state is turned on
or the control display is tapped outside of the
Welcome window, the welcome will be hidden.
The vehicle can store three BMW IDs or three
driver profiles.
63
Personal settings
CONTROLS
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the
settings of the guest profile will be ap-
plied.
Registering your BMW ID
To use a BMW ID, proceed as follows:
▷
▷
▷
Register your BMW ID.
▷
"Continue"
Activate the BMW ID.
The vehicle is added to the user’s My BMW
App.
Add or confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle.
Registration of your BMW ID in the vehicle can
be started via the BMW app.
Confirming a BMW ID
If the BMW ID was created by an authorized
service center and added to the vehicle, you
must then confirm the BMW ID in the vehicle:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3. "Register now"
1. Select the BMW ID.
2. Scan the QR code shown.
4. Scan the QR code shown in the display.
The BMW ID is created on the smartphone.
3. Follow the instructions on your smart-
phone.
Alternatively, the BMW ID can be registered by
an authorized service center and added to the
vehicle. The BMW ID must then be confirmed
on the control display in the corresponding ve-
hicle.
My BMW app
If a BMW ID has been added to a vehicle, the
vehicle is automatically added to the My BMW
App. This means that My BMW App functions
can be used for this vehicle. To do so, the My
BMW App must be used with the same BMW
ID.
Adding the BMW ID
An existing BMW ID can be added to the vehi-
cle:
Alternatively, an authorized service center can
add a vehicle to the My BMW App. In this case,
the BMW ID must then be confirmed on the
control display in the corresponding vehicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Add BMW ID"
3.
▷
▷
▷
"Log in with My BMW App"
"Log in with BMW ID"
In rare cases, the use of My BMW App func-
tions for this vehicle may be restricted. More
information is shown on the control display.
4.
Scan the QR code shown on the display.
The BMW ID is transferred from the My
BMW App.
Creating a driver profile
▷
Enter the access data for the BMW ID.
In countries where BMW ConnectedDrive is not
available, driver profiles can be created.
5. Depending on the national-market version,
the following settings can be selected:
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
▷
"Synchronize BMW ID"
The settings stored in the BMW Cloud
are applied.
2. "Add driver profile"
3. Enter the name for the driver profile.
4. Select the desired setting:
"Transfer settings"
▷
"Transfer settings"
64
Personal settings
CONTROLS
If the vehicle is in the guest profile, the set-
tings of the guest profile will be applied.
The vehicle key that is recognized in the
vehicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID
or the driver profile.
Primary user
▷
"Digital Key"
The primary user is the person who first adds
their BMW ID to the vehicle and first adds the
vehicle to their My BMW App. Alternatively, the
primary user can be defined by an authorized
service center.
The digital key that is recognized in the ve-
hicle interior is assigned to the BMW ID or
the driver profile.
Automatic driver recognition
If driver recognition has been established, au-
tomatic activation of the BMW ID or driver pro-
file is triggered by the following actions:
The primary user has access to the following
settings, for example:
▷
▷
Removing BMW IDs stored in the vehicle.
Transferring the primary user role to an-
other BMW ID.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using the button
on the assigned vehicle key.
▷
▷
Change vehicle-wide data protection set-
tings.
▷
By unlocking the vehicle using an external
door handle. The assigned vehicle key or
the assigned Digital Key must be carried
with you.
Create the main digital key.
Additional information:
▷
By automatic unlocking when approaching
the vehicle. The assigned vehicle key or the
assigned Digital Key must be carried with
you. Depending on the country, it may not
be possible to recognize the Digital Key.
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 79.
Specifying driver detection
Driver detection and a PIN can be set up for a
BMW ID or a driver profile.
If there are several vehicle keys or Digital Keys
in the vicinity of the vehicle, activation of the
BMW ID or driver profile is done according to
the following priority:
The driver detection offers the following ad-
vantages:
▷
The BMW ID or the driver profile with saved
settings is activated automatically.
▷
The key that unlocks the vehicle triggers
the activation of the assigned BMW ID or
the assigned driver profile.
▷
The settings are not accessible to other
persons.
The guest profile is activated when the ve-
hicle is unlocked using a key that is not as-
signed to a BMW ID or driver profile.
The driver detection is specified immediately
following the addition of the BMW ID or after
creating the driver profile.
▷
▷
If a vehicle key and a Digital Key are
detected at the same time, the Digital
Key triggers the activation of the assigned
BMW ID or the assigned driver profile.
Prior to the selection of the driver detection, a
PIN must be created.
▷
"Set PIN"
The PIN can be used to activate the
BMW ID or the driver profile, even if the
assigned vehicle key or the assigned digital
key is not available.
If another key is detected on the driver's
door after activating the BMW ID or the
driver profile, the BMW ID or the driver pro-
file of the last key detected is activated.
▷
"Vehicle key"
65
Personal settings
CONTROLS
If no BMW ID and no driver profile are as-
signed to this key, the guest profile is acti-
vated.
Guest profile
The guest profile can be activated and
changed by anyone.
In the following cases the guest profile is auto-
matically active:
Setting synchronization
If synchronization is switched on, settings from
the following areas, for example, are continu-
ously synchronized:
▷
A BMW ID has not yet been added or a
driver profile has not yet been created.
▷
No BMW ID or driver profile has been as-
signed to the vehicle key or the digital key
that was used to unlock the vehicle.
▷
▷
BMW ID, e.g., profile picture.
Navigation, e.g., recent destinations, home
address, or map settings.
The following limitations apply to the guest
profile:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Media, e.g., favorites or saved radio sta-
tions.
▷
Certain functions are not available, e.g.,
navigation functions or saving favorites.
iDrive, e.g., main menu configuration, lan-
guage, or units.
▷
▷
The guest profile cannot be renamed.
Personal Assistant, e.g., suggestions or ac-
tivation word.
It is not possible to assign a PIN to the
guest profile.
Exterior lighting, e.g., one-touch signaling
and home lights.
▷
▷
It is not possible to assign driver detection
to the guest profile.
Settings from the following areas are only
synchronized when you log in for the first time:
In ConnectedDrive countries, the synchroni-
zation with the BMW Cloud is not possible.
▷
Seating and climate comfort, e.g., driver’s
seat position or temperature setting.
The guest profile is selected on the Welcome
screen or via iDrive:
▷
Data protection menu.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
Selecting the BMW ID/driver profile
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
If the BMW ID or driver profile could not be
recognized when unlocking the vehicle, select
the BMW ID or driver profile on the welcome
window.
"Change driver profile"
3. "Continue as guest"
The BMW ID or driver profile can be changed
at any time via iDrive:
Deleting the BMW ID/driver profile
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2.
▷
▷
"Manage BMW IDs"
2.
▷
▷
"Change BMW ID"
"Change driver profile"
"Change driver profile"
3.
Tap the icon of the desired BMW ID or
the desired driver profile.
3. Select the BMW ID or driver profile.
4. If necessary, enter the PIN.
Removing a BMW ID from the vehicle causes
the vehicle to be removed from the My BMW
App. If the BMW ID has been synchronized
with the BMW Cloud, the data stored in the
The BMW ID or the driver profile are activated,
the stored settings are loaded.
66
Personal settings
CONTROLS
BMW Cloud is retained after the BMW ID is
deleted. If the currently active BMW ID is re-
moved, the guest profile is activated.
▷
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.
The profile picture.
The synchronization with the BMW Cloud.
The personal salutation.
Removing a vehicle from the My BMW App
removes the corresponding BMW ID from the
vehicle. If the BMW ID was synchronized with
the BMW Cloud, the BMW ID data stored in the
BMW Cloud will be retained.
The following settings are available for the
driver profile:
▷
▷
▷
The type of driver detection.
The profile picture.
If the vehicle is removed from the primary us-
er’s My BMW App, it will also be removed from
the My BMW App of the other users. The cor-
responding BMW IDs are removed from the
vehicle.
The profile name.
Selecting a profile picture
The profile picture can be selected from the
predefined profile pictures:
If the vehicle is reset to factory settings, it is
removed from each user’s My BMW App, and
all BMW IDs are removed from the vehicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
Transfer of the vehicle key
2. "Settings"
A vehicle key that is assigned to a BMW ID or
a driver profile can be used to view or change
the stored personal settings.
3. "Manage profile picture"
4. "Select profile picture"
The personal profile picture for a BMW ID can
be adopted from the profile in the My BMW
App. This requires that the synchronization
with the BMW Cloud is activated in the set-
tings. After transferring the profile picture from
the My BMW App, you can only select one of
the predefined images if the profile picture in
the My BMW App is deleted or synchronization
is deactivated.
Before a vehicle key is transferred to other per-
sons, any assigned driver detection should be
canceled. Changes to the driver detection can
be made in the settings of the BMW ID or the
driver profile.
The BMW Digital Key provides the option to
transfer a digital key to permit other persons
the use of your own vehicle.
Additional information:
System limits
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 79.
A clear driver detection via the vehicle key or
the digital key may not always be possible in
the following cases, for example:
Settings
General information
Settings added when adding a BMW ID or cre-
ating a driver profile can be changed.
▷
The driver changes, but the vehicle is not
locked and unlocked.
▷
When multiple vehicle keys or multiple digi-
tal keys with an assigned BMW ID or driver
profile are located in the outer area on the
driver's side of the vehicle.
1.
Tap the icon or personal picture in the
status bar.
2. "Settings"
▷
When the vehicle was unlocked via the My
BMW App.
The following settings are available for the
BMW ID:
67
Personal settings
CONTROLS
The use of personal settings that are stored for
a BMW ID in other vehicles is subject to techni-
cal limitations. For example, settings may be
stored for a system that is not available, or
available in a non-compatible version, in other
vehicles.
68
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Opening and closing
diately seek medical help if there is any sus-
picion that a battery or button cell battery has
been swallowed or is located in any part of
the body.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Overview
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Vehicle key
General information
Two vehicle keys are included in the scope of
delivery, each containing an integrated key.
Buttons on the vehicle key.
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat-
tery.
Icon
Meaning
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings are possible
for the button functions.
Unlock.
A BMW ID or a driver profile with personal set-
tings can be assigned to a vehicle key.
Lock.
Stationary climate control, refer to
page 230.
To provide information on maintenance rec-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
the vehicle key.
Unlock the trunk.
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle
key, take the vehicle key with you when exiting
the vehicle.
Panic mode.
Pathway lighting, refer to page 149.
Safety information
Additional vehicle keys
Additional vehicle keys are available from an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning
The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
Batteries or button cell batteries can be swal-
lowed and lead to serious or fatal injuries
within two hours, for example due to internal
burns or chemical burns. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep the vehicle key
and batteries out of reach of children. Imme-
69
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Push battery in arrow direction using a
Loss of vehicle keys
A lost vehicle key can be disabled and re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
pointed object and lift it out.
If the lost vehicle key has an assigned BMW ID
or driver profile, the connection to this vehicle
key must be deleted. A new vehicle key can
then be assigned to the BMW ID or driver pro-
file.
Replacing the battery
4. Insert a CR2032 3V battery with the posi-
tive side facing up.
NOTICE
5. Press the lid closed.
Improper batteries in a battery-operated de-
vice can damage the device. There is a risk
of damage to property. Always replace the
discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification.
6. Push the integrated key into the vehicle key
until the integrated key engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by an
authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop,
or take them to a collection point.
1. Remove the integrated key from the vehicle
key.
Integrated key
2. Place the integrated key underneath the
battery compartment cover, arrow 1, and
lift the lid with a lever movement of the
integrated key, arrow 2.
General information
The vehicle can be unlocked without the vehi-
cle key using the integrated key.
Depending on the national-market version, the
integrated key will fit in the glove compart-
ment.
Safety information
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
70
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
Unlocking the vehicle manually
1. Pull and hold the door handle outward with
one hand.
Removing the integrated key
1. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the
integrated key, arrow 2.
2. Unlock the door lock with the integrated key
by turning it counterclockwise.
2. Pull off frame from integrated key.
3. Open the driver's door.
4. Press the central locking button to unlock
the other doors.
With the vehicle de-energized: pull the door
opener of the other doors from the inside.
Locking the vehicle manually
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the vehicle.
71
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Overview
It is not possible to switch on the drive-ready
state if the vehicle key has not been detected.
Proceed as follows in this case:
1. Hold the rear of the vehicle key against the
mark on the steering column. Pay attention
to the display in the instrument cluster.
2.
▷
If the vehicle key is detected:
Turn on drive-ready state within 10 sec-
onds.
▷
If the vehicle key is not detected:
Door pin for manual locking of the driver's
door.
Slightly change the position of the vehi-
cle key and repeat the procedure.
Locking the vehicle
Malfunction
1. Close the driver's door.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
2. Press the lock button in the driver's door
downwards from the inside.
Vehicle key detection by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
3. Push the lock buttons of the other doors
down.
▷
▷
The battery of the vehicle key is discharged.
4. Close the locked doors.
Fault of the radio link from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
Alarm system
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key via the door lock, the activated alarm sys-
tem will be triggered when the door is opened.
▷
▷
Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
objects.
Do not transport the vehicle key together
with metal objects.
In this case, use the vehicle key emergency
detection to switch off the alarm.
Fault of the radio link from mobile phones
or other electronic devices in direct proxim-
ity to the vehicle key.
If the doors are manually locked from the in-
side, the alarm system is not activated.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close prox-
imity to other electronic devices.
Emergency detection of the vehicle
key
▷
▷
Fault of radio transmission by a charging
process of mobile devices, for instance
charging of a mobile phone.
The vehicle key is located in direct proximity
of the wireless charging tray.
Place the vehicle key in a different location.
In the case of interference, the vehicle can also
be unlocked and locked from the outside with
the integrated key. Use the Emergency detec-
72
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
tion of the vehicle key to turn on drive-ready
state.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Access to vehicle interior
Safety information
Warning
Actions during unlocking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when unlocking the vehi-
cle:
People or animals in the vehicle can lock the
doors from the inside and lock themselves in.
In this case, the vehicle cannot be opened
from the outside. There is a risk of injury.
Take the vehicle key with you so that the ve-
hicle can be opened from the outside.
▷
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
will be unlocked or all access to the vehicle
will be unlocked.
▷
▷
The unlocking of the vehicle can be con-
firmed with a light signal or a sound signal.
The welcome light can be turned on when
the vehicle is being unlocked.
In addition, the following functions are exe-
cuted:
Warning
For some national-market versions, unlock-
ing from the inside is only possible with par-
ticular knowledge.
▷
If a BMW ID or a driver profile was assigned
to the vehicle key, this BMW ID or driver
profile will be activated.
If persons or animals spend a lengthy time
in the vehicle and are thereby exposed to ex-
treme temperatures, there is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Do not lock the vehicle from
the outside when there are people or animals
in it. Do not leave babies, toddlers or animals
alone in the vehicle.
▷
▷
The interior lights are switched on, unless
they were manually switched off.
Depending on vehicle equipment, folded-in
exterior mirrors are folded out.
If the exterior mirrors were folded in via the
button in the vehicle interior, they will not
be folded out during unlocking.
▷
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched off.
The alarm system is switched off.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
Settings, refer to page 83.
Welcome lights, refer to page 148.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Actions during locking
Depending on the settings, the following func-
tions are performed when locking the vehicle:
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
73
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The locking of the vehicle can be confirmed
with a light signal or a sound signal.
On the external door handle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the exte-
rior mirrors can be folded in automatically
when locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers
are switched on.
Principle
The vehicle can be accessed without operating
the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
The following functions are executed:
▷
All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler flap
are locked.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
▷
Anti-theft protection is switched on. This
prevents the doors from being unlocked us-
ing the lock button or door opener.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
▷
The alarm system is switched on.
If the drive-ready state is still turned on when
you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn will honk
twice. In this case, the drive-ready state must
be switched off by means of the Start/Stop
button.
To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must be
outside of the vehicle near the doors.
After locking, approx. 2 seconds must
elapse before unlocking is possible.
Additional information:
Unlock vehicle
Settings, refer to page 83.
With the vehicle key
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
If only the driver's door and fuel filler flap have
been unlocked due to the settings in place,
press the button on the vehicle key again to
unlock the other vehicle access points.
Reach into the recessed grip of a front door.
Locking the vehicle
1. Close the driver's door.
The lighting functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
2. Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed door with your fin-
Locking the vehicle manually
1. Close the driver's door.
2.
Press the button on the vehicle key.
All vehicle access points are locked.
74
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
ger for approx. 1 second without reaching
into the recessed grip.
If the vehicle key is located in the unlocking
zone for an extended period of time without
movement, the vehicle will be locked automati-
cally.
If a passenger is detected in the front passen-
ger seat during locking and the seat belt of
the front passenger is engaged in the seat belt
buckle during locking:
▷
The vehicle will be locked but not secured
against theft.
▷
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Malfunction
Actions during unlocking
Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the lock-
ing request detection on the external door han-
dles.
If the settings specify that only the driver's
door and the charging socket flap will be un-
locked, note the following:
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and lock
the vehicle using the buttons of the vehicle key
or use the integrated key.
The driver's door and the charging socket flap
will only be unlocked when the driver is within
the unlocking zone of the driver's door.
Settings, refer to page 83.
Touchless unlocking/locking of the
vehicle
Functional requirements
▷
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
Principle
When the driver approaches the locked vehicle
with the vehicle key, the vehicle is unlocked.
▷
Unlocking: when entering the unlocking
zone, the doors and cargo area must be
closed.
When the driver walks away from the unlocked
vehicle with the vehicle key, the vehicle will be
locked.
▷
▷
Locking: when leaving the locking zone, the
doors and cargo area must be closed.
Automatic unlocking and locking must be
activated in the settings.
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
▷
▷
The drive-ready state must be turned off.
The vehicle will be unlocked when an author-
ized vehicle key is detected in the unlocking
zone.
For contactless locking of the vehicle, no
second vehicle key may be within a radius
of 18 ft/6 m around the vehicle.
The unlocking zone is located within a radius
of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m around the side and rear
of the vehicle.
▷
If the vehicle has been in the idle state for
several days, contactless unlocking/locking
will only be available after the vehicle has
been driven.
The vehicle will be locked when the vehicle key
leaves the locking zone.
Additional information:
The locking zone is located within a radius of
approx. 9 ft/3 m around the side and rear of
the vehicle.
Settings, refer to page 83.
75
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
With the Key Card
Principle
The Key Card is a chip card on which the digi-
tal key is installed. The Key Card can be used
to unlock and lock the vehicle.
Additional information:
Key Card, refer to page 78.
General information
The Key Card is available with Comfort Access.
Hold the near field communication antenna of
the smartphone directly and centered on the
external door handle of the driver's door. The
position of the near field communication an-
tenna depends on the smartphone model.
Locking/unlocking the vehicle
When locking the vehicle with the smartphone,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
Frequently Asked Questions
What precautions can be taken to be able to
open a vehicle, despite accidentally locking in
the vehicle key?
Hold activated Key Card directly on the center
of the external door handle of the driver's door.
▷
The app’s remote services offer the option
to lock and unlock a vehicle.
When locking the vehicle with the Key Card,
make sure that all doors and the trunk are
closed.
This requires an active BMW Connected-
Drive contract, and the app must be instal-
led on a smartphone.
If the Key Card is not detected, slightly change
the position of the Key Card and repeat the
procedure.
▷
Unlocking the vehicle can be requested via
the BMW ConnectedDrive Call Center.
An active BMW ConnectedDrive contract is
required.
With the BMW Digital Key
Principle
Access to the cargo area
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, a digital key can be installed
on a compatible smartphone and used to un-
lock and lock the vehicle.
General information
It may not be possible to open the cargo area
when the vehicle is in valet parking mode.
Additional information:
Additional information:
BMW Digital Key, refer to page 79.
Valet parking mode, refer to page 82.
76
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Safety information
On the trunk
General information
With Comfort Access, the cargo area can be
accessed without activating the vehicle key.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the trunk lid. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the travel path of the trunk lid is
clear while opening and closing.
The key is automatically detected near the ve-
hicle.
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, e.g., in your
pants pocket.
Warning
While opening, the trunk lid pivots back and
up. There is a risk of injury and risk of dam-
age to property. Make sure that the travel
path of the trunk lid is clear while opening
and closing.
Opening the trunk
With the vehicle key
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehicle,
do not place the vehicle key in the cargo area.
▷
▷
Unlock the vehicle and then press the but-
ton on the trunk.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the following settings can be
changed:
With Comfort Access: carry the vehicle key
with you and press the button on the trunk.
▷
Unlocking the cargo area with the vehicle
key also unlocks the doors.
Locked doors are not unlocked.
▷
Before unlocking the cargo area with the
vehicle key, first unlock the vehicle.
Closing the cargo area
Pull down the cargo area using the recessed
grips.
Functional requirements
Selector lever position P must be engaged to
open the cargo area with the vehicle key.
In the interior
You must enable the setting for opening with
the vehicle key.
Functional prerequisite
The vehicle key or digital key must be located
inside the vehicle in order to close the cargo
area using the button in the vehicle interior.
Additional information:
Settings, refer to page 83.
Unlocking the trunk
Unlocking the trunk
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key for approx. 1 second.
Press the button in the driver's door.
77
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Trunk emergency unlocking
Activating/deactivating Key Card in
the vehicle
General information
When the BMW Digital Key is activated for the
vehicle, a digital key can be used instead of the
vehicle key.
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
Pull the handle inside the cargo area.
The trunk is unlocked.
Functional requirement
A vehicle key must be located in the vehicle to
activate and deactivate the Key Card.
Activating Key Card
Key Card
Principle
The Key Card allows the vehicle to be unlocked
and locked, as well as started.
General information
Key Card availability depends on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market version.
A digital key that has already been paired with
the vehicle is installed on the Key Card. The
digital key must be activated via iDrive.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place Key Card in the center of the smart-
phone tray.
Before leaving the vehicle, deactivate the Key
Card or take the Key Card with you because
the active Key Card can be used to start the
vehicle. Always take the vehicle key with you to
a service appointment.
3. Follow instructions on the control display.
Deactivating Key Card
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Safety information
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
NOTICE
5. "Key Card"
If the Key Card and a mobile device are in the
wireless charging tray at the same time, the
Key Card could become damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property. Do not place the
Key Card in the wireless charging tray at the
same time as a mobile device.
6. "Deactivate Key Card"
A deactivated Key Card remains in the list of
paired digital keys.
78
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
BMW Digital Key can be used with a compat-
ible smartphone or other compatible mobile
devices.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked with
the activated Key Card.
To unlock and start a vehicle with a compatible
smartphone, this function must be offered by
the smartphone manufacturer. The My BMW
app can be used to check if the smartphone
and vehicle are compatible and which func-
tions are supported.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 73.
Turning on the drive-ready state
A BMW ID or a driver profile with individual
settings can be assigned to a digital key.
When using a smartphone as a Digital Key,
always carry a vehicle key or the activated Key
Card with you. This ensures access to the ve-
hicle, even in the event of a smartphone fail-
ure. It is also helpful to have the vehicle key
or Key Card with you if the vehicle needs to
be handed over to another person. You can
then hand over the vehicle key or the Key Card
instead of your smartphone.
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place activated Key Card in the center of
the smartphone tray.
Always take the vehicle key with you to a serv-
ice appointment.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
After drive-ready state is switched on, the Key
Card can be removed from the tray.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Key Card, refer to page 78.
Malfunction
The detection of the Key Card by the vehicle
may be disrupted by objects between the sen-
sors and the Key Card such as a wallet or a
smartphone cover.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is compatible with BMW
Digital Key
The vehicle is linked with the Connected-
Drive account of the vehicle owner.
BMW Digital Key
The rechargeable battery of the smart-
phone has a sufficient charge. The neces-
sary minimum charge of the rechargeable
battery depends on the smartphone.
Principle
BMW Digital Key allows the vehicle to be un-
locked and locked, as well as started, with a
compatible smartphone.
Enabling the main digital key
General information
BMW Digital Key availability and functionality
depend on vehicle equipment and national-
market version.
Vehicle owner's smartphone is enabled as a
main digital key in the vehicle. The vehicle
owner must prove his authorization for the ve-
hicle for this purpose.
79
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
You can begin the authorization process us-
ing the My BMW app or using your activation
code in the corresponding smartphone func-
tion, e.g., the Wallet app. Both vehicle keys
must be in the vehicle during activation.
Deleting digital keys
General information
Deleted digital keys will be removed from the
list of enabled digital keys.
Follow the activation instructions in the Digital
Key menu in the app or on the control display.
Deleted digital keys cannot be restored.
Deleting the main digital key
The main digital key can be deleted from the
smartphone or via iDrive.
Sharing digital keys
General information
The deletion of the main digital key is com-
pleted immediately.
Digital key allows the sharing of digital keys
with other people. This option is available via
the smartphone that is enabled as main digital
key. This function must be supported by the
smartphone.
Deleting a shared key
Shared keys can be deleted using the smart-
phone with the master Digital Key, using the
smartphone with the shared key to be deleted,
or via iDrive.
Forwarding authorization
To share the digital key, select the correspond-
ing function on the smartphone, for instance in
the Wallet app.
The deletion via the smartphone using the
main digital key will not be performed until the
vehicle is used with a key other than the key to
be deleted.
As soon as a digital key is shared with another
person, the person will receive an invitation.
When the invitation is accepted, the digital key
on the recipient's smartphone will be activated.
If the smartphone associated with a shared
key or iDrive is used to delete a shared key, it
will be deleted immediately.
Limiting the range of functions
Deletion via iDrive
Certain functions of the digital key can be lim-
ited before handing it over. For instance, if the
Digital Key is passed on to a novice driver, the
switch-off for driving stability control systems
can be disabled and the engine power can
be reduced. For more information, refer to the
ConnectedDrive Portal and My BMW app.
To delete a digital key via iDrive, there must be
an authorized vehicle key in the vehicle, or the
master Digital Key must be in the smartphone
tray.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
Authentication
Depending on the recipient’s smartphone
model, an authentication may be required for
security and safety reasons.
5. If necessary, select the digital key.
6. Delete the Digital Key.
An authorized vehicle key, the main digital key
or another method may be used for authenti-
cation. Follow the corresponding instructions
on the smartphone or the control display.
80
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
3. Close the cover of the smartphone tray.
Resetting the function
To reset the BMW Digital Key function, an au-
thorized vehicle key must be located in the ve-
hicle.
4. Press the Start/Stop button to turn on the
drive-ready state.
Sale of the smartphone
When resetting the BMW Digital Key function,
all digital keys including the main digital key
will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is not
deleted.
Delete all digital keys on the smartphone prior
to selling the smartphone. This ensures that
the smartphone can no longer be used for the
vehicle.
After the reset, the vehicle can no longer be
unlocked, locked or started with a digital key.
Changing smartphones
The main digital key must be enabled again to
be able to use BMW Digital Key again.
To use a new smartphone as a master Digital
Key, activate the new smartphone according to
the instructions for the master Digital Key. The
previous master key is deleted when the new
smartphone is activated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Digital Key"
Sale of the vehicle
5. "Reset function"
Prior to selling a vehicle, reset the Digital
Key function or remove the vehicle from the
ConnectedDrive account of the current vehicle
owner.
Unlocking and locking the vehicle
The vehicle can be unlocked and locked using
the external door handle.
When the vehicle is removed from the Con-
nectedDrive account, all digital keys for the ve-
hicle will be deleted. The Key Card digital key is
not deleted.
Additional information:
Access to the vehicle interior, refer to page 73.
Turning on the drive-ready state
System limits
The interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sen-
sor of the alarm system cannot be switched off
with a digital key.
Using the smartphone tray
Additional information:
Alarm system, refer to page 84.
Malfunction
Digital key recognition by the vehicle may mal-
function under the following circumstances:
1. Open the cover of the smartphone tray.
2. Place smartphone in the center of the
smartphone tray.
Ensure that the display is facing up.
81
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
The smartphone is shielded from the sen-
sors in the vehicle by a smartphone cover
that is not suitable.
The vehicle is not secured against theft when
locking.
Unlocking the vehicle
Objects such as a chip card or the Key Card
are located between the smartphone and
the smartphone cover.
Press the button.
Fault of the connection from transmission
towers or other equipment with high trans-
mitting power.
Opening the door
▷
Press the button to unlock all the
doors.
Shielding of the smartphone due to build-
ings or metal objects.
Pull the door opener above the arm-
rest.
Buttons for the central
locking system
▷
▷
Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors re-
main locked.
Back doors: pull twice on the door handle
on the door to be opened; the first time
unlocks the door, the second time opens it.
The other doors remain locked.
General information
The vehicle is automatically locked when driv-
ing off.
In the event of a severe accident, the vehicle
is automatically unlocked. The hazard warning
system and interior lights are illuminated.
Valet parking mode
Overview
Principle
In the valet parking mode, the control display is
disabled.
E.g., this mode can be used when the vehicle
is handed over for valet parking.
General information
Depending on the national-market version, the
valet parking mode may not be available.
Valet Parking mode has the following restric-
tions:
The central locking buttons are located on the
front door.
▷
Vehicle settings cannot be changed via
iDrive.
Locking the vehicle
▷
Settings stored to a BMW ID or guest pro-
file cannot be changed.
Press the button in the driver's door
or front passengers door with the front
doors closed.
▷
▷
Personal data cannot be displayed.
The volume of the audio system is limited.
The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
82
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
The integrated Universal Remote Control is
deactivated.
Settings
Dynamic Stability Control cannot be turned
off.
General information
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, various settings for opening
and closing are possible.
The availability of certain settings of the
driving modes is limited.
Additional information:
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Unlocking and locking
Functional requirement
Doors
The driver has registered in the vehicle with a
BMW ID.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
Activating the valet parking mode
1.
Apps menu
5. "Unlock"
2. "Vehicle"
6. Select the desired setting:
3. "System settings"
4. "Valet parking mode"
5. "Lock tailgate"
▷
"Driver's door only"
Only the driver's door and the fuel filler
flap are unlocked. Pressing again un-
locks the entire vehicle.
The cargo area is locked and disconnected
from the central locking system.
▷
"All doors"
6. If necessary, "PIN"
The entire vehicle is unlocked.
If the active BMW ID does not have an as-
signed PIN, this PIN must be set now. The
PIN is needed to deactivate the valet park-
ing mode.
Touchless unlocking/locking
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
7. If necessary, enter the PIN.
8. "Activate valet parking mode"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Comfort access"
5. Select the desired setting.
Deactivating valet parking mode
1. Select the desired BMW ID on the lock
screen.
Automatic unlocking
1.
Apps menu
2.
▷
Enter the assigned PIN for the BMW ID.
2. "Vehicle"
If you have forgotten the PIN: enter the
access data for the BMW ID.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
▷
If the selected BMW ID does not have
an assigned PIN: enter the access data
for the BMW ID.
5. Select the desired setting:
▷
▷
"Unlock doors at end of trip"
"Unlock doors when in P"
83
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
After drive-ready state is switched off, the
locked vehicle is unlocked automatically by
pressing the start/stop button or engaging se-
lector lever position P.
Cargo area
Cargo area and doors
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Automatic locking
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Tailgate"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
5. Select the desired setting:
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
▷
"Tailgate"
Depending on the equipment, the cargo
area will be unlocked or opened.
5. "Lock after a short time"
The vehicle locks automatically after a short
period of time if no door is opened after un-
locking.
▷
"Tailgate and door(s)"
Depending on the equipment, the trunk
will be unlocked or opened and the
doors are unlocked.
Confirmation signals from the vehicle
▷
▷
"Tailgate will only open if vehicle is
already unlocked"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
The vehicle must be unlocked before
the cargo area can be operated with the
vehicle key.
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
5. Select the desired setting:
"Lock tailgate button"
▷
"Flash on lock/unlock"
Operating the cargo area with the vehi-
cle key is disabled.
Unlocking is signaled by flashing twice,
locking by flashing once.
▷
With alarm system:
Alarm system
"Sound on lock/unlock"
Unlocking is confirmed with two sound
signals, locking is confirmed with one
sound signal.
Principle
The alarm system issues a visual and acoustic
signal when someone attempts to open the
locked vehicle incorrectly.
Folding mirrors in automatically
1.
Apps menu
General information
When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle alarm
system reacts to the following changes:
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Doors and windows"
4. "Lock/unlock"
▷
Opening a door, the hood, or the cargo
area.
5. "Fold mirrors on lock/unlock"
▷
Movements in the interior.
84
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
Changes in the vehicle inclination such as
during attempts at stealing a wheel or
when towing the vehicle.
Panic mode
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation.
▷
▷
Disconnected battery voltage.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
Improper use of the socket for OBD on-
board diagnostics.
▷
Briefly press the button on the vehi-
cle key three times in succession.
▷
Locking the vehicle while a device is con-
nected to the diagnostic socket.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The alarm system signals these changes visu-
ally and acoustically:
Indicator light on the interior mirror
▷
Acoustic alarm:
Depending on local regulations, the acous-
tic alarm may be suppressed.
▷
Optical alarm:
By flashing of the hazard warning system
and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure function of
the alarm system.
Turning the alarm system on/off
The alarm system is turned on as soon as the
vehicle is locked from the outside.
▷
▷
The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked from a greater distance with
the My BMW App or manually from the inside.
The indicator light flashes for approx.
10 seconds, then flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched off as soon as
the vehicle is unlocked.
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm sensor
are not active, as doors, hood, or tailgate
are not correctly closed. Correctly closed
access points are secured.
Opening the doors with the alarm
system switched on
The alarm system is triggered when a door
is opened if the door was unlocked using the
integrated key in the door lock.
When the remaining open access points
are closed, the interior motion sensor and
tilt alarm sensor will be turned on.
▷
The indicator light flashes even though all
access points have been closed:
Opening the cargo area with the
alarm system switched on
The cargo area can be opened even when the
alarm system is switched on.
Alarm system error.
▷
▷
The indicator light goes out after unlocking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
The indicator light flashes after unlocking
until drive-ready state is switched on, but
no longer than approx. 5 minutes:
After closing the cargo area, the cargo area will
be locked and monitored again. The hazard
warning system flashes once during closing.
85
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The alarm has been triggered.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor are switched off until the vehicle is locked
again.
Tilt alarm sensor
The inclination of the vehicle is monitored.
Ending the alarm
Unlock the vehicle.
The alarm system responds in situations such
as attempts to steal a wheel or when the vehi-
cle is towed.
If the vehicle is unlocked with the integrated
key, the drive-ready state must subsequently
be turned on via the emergency detection of
the vehicle key.
Interior motion sensor
The vehicle interior is monitored.
The alarm system responds when movement
is detected in the vehicle interior.
Window
The windows and the glass sunroof must be
closed for the system to function properly.
General information
When a window is frequently opened to the
same position, this task can be performed by
the BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant. This is
useful if you frequently use the same parking
garage, for example.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sen-
sor can trigger an alarm, although no unau-
thorized action occurred.
Additional information:
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 51.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
▷
▷
▷
In car washes.
Safety information
In duplex garages.
During transport on trains carrying vehicles,
at sea or on a trailer.
Warning
When operating the windows, body parts and
objects can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. Make sure
that the travel path of the windows is clear
while opening and closing.
▷
▷
With animals in the vehicle.
When the vehicle is locked after start of re-
fueling.
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior motion
sensor can be switched off in such situations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
With the vehicle key
Opening windows
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the vehi-
cle is locked.
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The indicator light illuminates for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The windows open for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
86
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
Closing the windows
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key after lock-
ing.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
The windows close for as long as the button
on the vehicle key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
In the interior
Overview
On the external door handle
Principle
The windows can be closed using the external
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
Power windows
General information
The function is available with Comfort Access.
Functional requirements
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in
your pants pocket.
▷
Standby state is switched on.
▷
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key or a digital key must be inside
of the vehicle.
Closing the windows
Opening windows
▷
Press the switch to the resistance
point.
The window opens while the switch
is being held.
▷
Press the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window opens automatically.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed door with your finger
and hold it there without grasping the recessed
grip.
Closing the windows
▷
Pull the switch to the resistance
point.
87
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
The window closes while the switch is be-
ing held.
The window closes with limited jam protec-
tion. If the closing force exceeds a specific
threshold, closing is interrupted.
▷
Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point.
The window closes automatically.
Pulling again stops the motion.
2. Pull the
switch past the resistance
point again within approx. 4 seconds and
hold it there.
Jam protection system
The window closes without jam protection.
Principle
Glass sunroof
Safety information
Warning
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
General information
Body parts can be jammed when operating
the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of the
glass sunroof is clear during opening and
closing.
If resistance or blockage is detected while a
window is being closed, the closing will be in-
terrupted.
Safety information
Warning
With the vehicle key
Accessories on the windows such as anten-
nas can impact jam protection. There is a
risk of injury. Do not install accessories in the
area of movement of the windows.
Opening glass sunroof
Press and hold the button on the vehi-
cle key after unlocking.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
opened for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Closing without the jam protection
system
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
Closing glass sunroof
With Comfort Access: press and hold
the button on the vehicle key in close
range of the vehicle after locking.
1. Pull the
switch past the resistance
point and hold it there.
The glass sunroof with sun protection will be
closed for as long as the button on the vehicle
key is pressed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
88
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
The vehicle key must be in the car's interior.
On the door handle
Principle
The glass sunroof can be closed using the
door handle without operating the vehicle key.
General information
The glass sunroof and the sun protection are
operated using the same switch.
The vehicle key is automatically detected near
the vehicle.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Functional prerequisite
Carry the vehicle key with you, for instance in
your pants pocket.
Closing glass sunroof
Opening/closing the glass sun-
roof/sun protection.
Touch the grooved surface on the external
door handle of a closed door with your finger
and hold it there without grasping the recessed
grip.
Lifting/closing glass sunroof
Push switch briefly upward.
▷
The closed glass sunroof tilts
and the sun protection opens
slightly.
In addition to locking, the windows and glass
sunroof with sun protection will be closed.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, exterior
mirrors are folded in unless they were folded
in while locking. The exterior mirrors are not
folded in when the hazard warning flashers are
switched on.
▷
The opened glass sunroof
closes until it is in the tilted
position. The sun protection
does not move.
▷
The tilted glass sunroof closes.
In the interior
Functional requirements
The glass sunroof and sun protection can be
operated under the following conditions.
89
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
Pressing the switch again
stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection separately
▷
Briefly press out the switch twice in succes-
sion toward the front past the resistance
point.
▷
Slide switch back to the re-
sistance point and hold.
Holding down the switch
opens the sun protection. If
the sun protection is already
fully open, the glass sunroof
opens.
The glass sunroof and sun protection close
together.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
▷
▷
Slide switch forward to the resistance point
and hold.
Comfort position
In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof is
not fully open. In these models, the automatic
function initially only opens the glass sunroof
up to this comfort position.
The glass sunroof closes while the switch
is being held. If the glass sunroof is already
closed or in the tilted position, the sun pro-
tection closes.
Slide the switch back past the resistance
point.
Pressing the switch in the vehicle interior again
opens the glass sunroof fully.
The sun protection opens automatically. If
the sun protection is already fully open, the
glass sunroof opens automatically.
Anti-trap mechanism
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Principle
▷
Push the switch forward past the resistance
point.
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof frame and glass sunroof while the glass
sunroof is closing.
The glass sunroof closes automatically. If
the glass sunroof is already closed or in
the tilted position, the sun protection closes
automatically.
General information
If a resistance or blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is closing, the closing opera-
tion is interrupted once the roof reaches the
half-open position, or it is stopped when clos-
ing from the tilted position.
Pressing the switch again stops the motion.
Opening/closing the glass sunroof and
sun protection together
▷
Briefly press out the switch
twice in succession toward
the rear past the resistance
point.
Closing from the open position without
jam protection
If an external hazard or ice prevents normal
closure, proceed as follows:
The glass sunroof and sun
protection open together.
90
Opening and closing
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The drive-ready state is established.
1. Close all doors.
The outside temperature is above
41 ℉/5 ℃.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
During initialization, the glass sunroof closes
without the anti-trap mechanism.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Make sure that the closing path is clear.
The glass sunroof closes with limited jam
protection. If the closing force exceeds a
specific threshold, closing is interrupted.
Initializing the system
4. Push the switch forward again past the re-
sistance point and hold until the glass sun-
roof closes without jam protection. Make
sure that the closing path is clear.
Press the switch up and hold
it until the initialization is com-
plete:
Closing from the lifted position without
jam protection
In case of danger from the outside or if icing
might prevent normal closing, proceed as fol-
lows:
Initialization begins within 15 seconds.
▷
▷
▷
If the glass sunroof is closed, it opens then
closes again.
If the glass sunroof is open, it first closes,
then opens and closes again.
The sun protection is initialized in the
closed position.
Initialization is complete once the glass sun-
roof and the sun protection have opened then
closed again.
1. Close all doors.
2. Switch on drive-ready state or stop a mov-
ing vehicle.
3. Push the switch forward past the resistance
point and hold.
Initializing after a power interruption
General information
After a power interruption during the opening
or closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. Initializing the
system can help in this case.
The system can be initialized under the follow-
ing conditions:
▷
The vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
tion.
▷
The vehicle will not be moved until the initi-
alization is completed.
91
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Vehicle features and options
Warning
With a backrest inclined too far to the rear,
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
the protective effect of the seat belt can no
longer be ensured. There is a risk of sliding
under the seat belt in an accident. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Adjust the seat
prior to starting the trip. Adjust the backrest
so that it is in the most upright position as
possible and do not adjust again while driv-
ing.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Sitting safely
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of
the occupants can make a vital contribution to
relaxed, fatigue-free driving.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the in-
formation in the following chapters.
Additional information:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Seats, refer to page 92.
Manually adjustable seats
Seat belts, refer to page 97.
Head restraints, refer to page 99.
Airbags, refer to page 155.
Overview
Seats
Safety information
Warning
Seat setting while driving can lead to unex-
pected movements of the seat. Vehicle con-
trol could be lost. There is a risk of accident.
Only adjust the seat on the driver's side when
the vehicle is stationary.
The levers for setting the seats are located on
the front seats.
92
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Setting the longitudinal direction
Adjusting the height
Warning
If a seat is not locked, it may move unexpect-
edly while driving. Vehicle control could be
lost. There is a risk of an accident or injuries.
After adjusting, move the seat forward or
back slightly, making sure the seat engages
properly.
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed until the seat has reached the desired
height.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the desired
direction.
Adjusting seat tilt
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the
backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Electrically adjustable seats
General information
The current seat position can be stored using
the memory function.
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as
needed until the seat has reached the desired
inclination.
93
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Overview
Adjusting seat tilt
The switches for setting the seats are located
on the front seats.
Tilt switch up or down.
Adjusting backrest tilt
Setting the longitudinal direction
Tilt switch forward or backward.
Press switch forward or backward.
Adjusting the seat position
automatically
Adjusting the height
General information
The seat setting for the driver's seat is stored
in the active BMW ID or in the active driver
profile. If the BMW ID or the driver profile is
reactivated at a later time, the saved position
will be called up automatically.
Activate/deactivate the function
1.
Apps menu
Press switch up or down.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Seat comfort"
4. Select driver’s seat.
5. "Use automatically"
6. Select the desired setting.
94
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the backrest width
Thigh support
▷
Press the front section of the but-
ton:
Sport seat
The backrest width decreases.
▷
Press the rear section of the button:
The backrest width increases.
Entering the rear
Safety information
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and push
the thigh support forward or back.
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Lumbar support
Principle
The curvature of the seat backrest can be ad-
justed in a way that it supports the lumbar
region of the spine. The lower back and the
spine are supported for upright sitting position.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur if the rear
seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle control
could be lost. There is a risk of injury. Fold
back and lock the backrests before driving.
Make sure the backrest engages correctly by
slightly moving forward and back.
Adjusting the lumbar support
▷
Press the front/rear section of the
button:
The curvature is increased/de-
creased.
▷
Press the upper/lower section of the but-
ton:
The curvature is shifted up/down.
Backrest width
Principle
Adjusting the backrest width may improve side
support when cornering.
General information
The backrest width is changed by adjusting
the side sections of the backrest.
95
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Push the seat backrest rearward
Manual longitudinal setting
Push the seat backrest rearward and lock it.
Fold the seat backrest forward
The seat moves automatically to the last seat
position that was stored.
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Calibrating the front seats
General information
As soon as the electric seat setting no longer
functions precisely, a Check Control message
is displayed on the control display.
To restore the accuracy of the electric seat set-
ting, the front seats must be calibrated.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
3. Push the seat forward.
Safety information
Push the seat backrest rearward
Warning
1. Push the seat back into the initial position.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Electric longitudinal setting
Fold the seat backrest forward
1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Calibrating the front seat
1. Press the longitudinal direction switch for-
ward until the seat stops.
2. Press the switch forward again until the
seat stops.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired position.
As soon as the message on the control dis-
play disappears, the calibration is complete.
If the message remains active, repeat the cali-
bration.
2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
If the message is still shown after repeated
calibration, have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
To make the entry to the rear easier, the seat
will automatically move to the most forward
position.
The process will be terminated when the
switch for the forward/back direction adjust-
ment is pressed or the backrest is reclined.
96
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seat belts
Warning
With a rear seat backrest that is not locked,
the protective effect of the middle seat belt
is not guaranteed. There is a risk of injury or
danger to life. If you are using the middle seat
belt, lock the wider rear seat backrest.
General information
The vehicle is fitted with four seat belts to en-
sure occupant safety. However, they can only
offer protection when adjusted correctly.
Always make sure that seat belts are being
worn by the occupants before driving off. The
airbags supplement the seat belts as an ad-
ditional safety device. The airbags do not re-
place seat belts.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, may not be fully operational or fail
in the following situations:
All seat belt anchorage points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect for
the seat belts when used properly and with the
correct seat settings.
▷
The seat belts or seat belt buckles are
damaged, soiled, or changed in any
other way.
Additional information:
▷
Seat belt tensioners or roll-up mecha-
nism were modified.
Notes on sitting safely, refer to page 92.
Seat belts can be imperceptibly damaged in
the event of an accident. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Keep clean and do
not modify seat belts, seat belt buckles, seat
belt tensioners, roll-up mechanisms, and belt
anchors. After an accident, have the seat
belts checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Safety information
Warning
Use of a seat belt to buckle more than one
person will potentially defeat the ability of
the seat belt to serve its protective function.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Do not strap in more than one person per
single seat belt. Infants and children are not
allowed on an occupant's lap, but must be
transported and secured in designated child
restraint systems.
Correct use of seat belts
▷
Wear the seat belt tight to your body over
your lap and shoulders, without twisting it.
▷
Wear the seat belt deep on your hips over
your lap. The seat belt must not press on
your stomach.
Warning
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing seat belts correctly.
▷
Do not rub the seat belt against sharp
edges, or guide it or jam it in across hard
or fragile objects.
▷
▷
Avoid thick clothing.
Re-tighten the seat belt frequently upward
around your upper body area.
97
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable. Check whether the seat belt has
been fastened correctly.
Buckling the seat belt
1. Guide the seat belt slowly over shoulder
and hip to put it on.
Icon
Meaning
2. Insert the buckle tongue into the seat belt
buckle. The seat belt buckle must engage
audibly.
Seat belt on the driver's seat is
not buckled.
Seat belt on the passenger
seat or another seat in the ve-
hicle is not buckled.
Seat belt is buckled on the cor-
responding seat.
Seat belt is not buckled on the
corresponding seat.
To ease accessibility to the seat belt buckle, an
adjustable slider is available on the belt to help
position the buckle when not in use.
Rear Occupant Alert
Unbuckling the seat belt
Principle
1. Hold down the seat belt firmly.
At the end of a trip, the system informs the
driver of the possible presence of occupants on
the rear seats.
2. Press the red button in the seat belt buckle.
3. Guide the seat belt back into its roll-up
mechanism.
General information
If a door with access to the rear row seating
is operated within 30 minutes before starting
off, a message appears on the control display
when the trip is completed and a signal tone
sounds.
Seat belt reminder
General information
Make sure that the seat belts are positioned
correctly.
If the trip is continued within 30 minutes, the
message is displayed again after the trip has
been completed.
The seat belt reminder becomes active in the
following situations:
▷
▷
▷
When the seat belt on the driver's side or
on the passenger's side is not fastened.
Activate/deactivate the function
When the seat belt is unfastened while driv-
ing.
1.
Apps menu
2. "System settings"
When objects are lying on a seat.
3. "Rear Occupant Alert"
4. Select the desired setting.
Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light in the instrument cluster illu-
minates after turning on the drive-ready state
when the seat belt reminder is active.
98
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Adjusting the height
Front head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Adjusting the height: M Sport seat
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
Press switch up or down.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
Adjusting the distance
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
Press the button and push the head restraint
forward or backward.
99
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
After setting the distance, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Rear head restraints
Safety information
Warning
Adjusting the distance: M Sport seat
The distance to the back of the head is ad-
justed via the backrest inclination.
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head re-
straints can cause injuries in the head and
neck area. There is a risk of injury.
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint
is as close as possible to the back of the head.
▷
Before driving, install the removed head
restraints on the occupied seats.
Removing the head restraints
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
▷
Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
▷
Adjust the distance so that the head re-
straint is as close as possible to the back
of the head. Adjust the distance via the
backrest tilt as needed.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving the
head restraint. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement is clear when
moving the head restraint.
1. Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint out completely.
Removing the head restraints: M
Sport seat
The head restraints cannot be removed.
Warning
Objects on the head restraint reduce the pro-
tective effect in the head and neck area.
There is a risk of injury.
Installing head restraints
Proceed in the reverse order to install the head
restraint.
▷
▷
Do not use seat or head restraint covers.
Do not hang objects, for instance clothes
hangers, directly on the head restraint.
▷
▷
Only use accessories that have been de-
termined to be safe for attachment to a
head restraint.
Do not use any accessories, for instance
pillows, while driving.
100
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Folding down the head restraints
Removing the head restraint
Only remove the head restraint if no one will be
sitting in the seat in question.
General information
To improve the view to the rear, the head re-
straints can be folded down. Only fold down
the head restraint if no one will be sitting in the
corresponding seat.
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest in ques-
tion.
Enlarging the cargo area, refer to page 245.
2. Raise the head restraint up against the re-
sistance.
Folding down the head restraints
3. Insert the integrated key.
Integrated key, refer to page 69.
Press button, arrow 1, and fold the head re-
straint back.
To return the head restraint to its initial posi-
tion, fold the head restraint forward as far as
it will go. Make sure that the head restraint
engages correctly.
4. Press and hold the integrated key and the
button at the same time, arrows 1, and pull
out the head restraint completely.
Adjusting the height
Installing head restraints
For installation, insert the head restraints in
the mounts and slide them down until you feel
resistance.
▷
▷
To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
After the installation, make sure that the head
restraint engages correctly.
To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
101
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Icon
Meaning
Exterior mirrors
Fold the exterior mirror in and out.
General information
The front passenger's side exterior mirror is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Adjust the exterior mirrors.
The exterior mirror adjustment is stored in the
active BMW ID or in the active driver profile. If
the BMW ID or the driver profile is reactivated
at a later time, the stored position is called up
automatically.
Select exterior mirror, Automatic Curb
Monitor.
The current exterior mirror adjustment can be
stored using the memory function.
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
Press the button.
The selected exterior mirror moves
along with the button movement.
Safety information
Warning
Selecting the exterior mirror
Objects reflected in the mirror are closer than
they appear. The distance to the road users
behind could be incorrectly estimated, for in-
stance while changing lanes. There is a risk
of accident. Estimate the distance to the traf-
fic behind by looking over your shoulder.
To change over to the other mirror:
Slide the switch.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust the
exterior mirror by pressing on the edges of the
mirror glass.
Overview
Folding in/folding out the exterior
mirrors
NOTICE
Depending on the vehicle width, the vehicle
can be damaged in car washes. There is a
risk of damage to property. Before washing,
fold in the mirrors by hand or with the button.
Press the button.
Folding is possible up to a speed of approx.
15 mph/20 km/h.
Folding the exterior mirrors in and out is help-
ful in the following situations:
102
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In car washes.
Interior mirror, manually
dimmable
On narrow roads.
Exterior mirrors that were folded in are folded
out automatically at a speed of approx.
25 mph/40 km/h.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically heated
as needed and when the drive-ready state is
switched on.
Automatic dimming
The exterior mirror on the driver's side is au-
tomatically dimmed. Photocells in the interior
mirror are used to control this.
To reduce the blinding glare of the interior mir-
ror, flip the lever forward.
Automatic Curb Monitor
Interior mirror, automatic
dimming feature
Principle
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass on
the passenger's side is tilted downward. This
improves your view of the curb and other low-
lying obstacles when parking, for instance.
General information
The interior mirror is dimmed automatically.
Photocells are used for control:
▷
▷
In the mirror glass.
Activating the Automatic Curb Monitor
On the rear of the mirror.
1.
slide the switch to the driver's side
mirror position.
Overview
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating the Automatic Curb
Monitor
Slide the switch to the front passenger's side
exterior mirror position.
Functional requirements
▷
Keep the photocells clean.
▷
Do not cover the area between the interior
mirror and the windshield.
103
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Turning the steering wheel heating
on/off
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning
Press the button.
A Check Control message is displayed.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 minutes
after an intermediate stop, the steering wheel
heating turns on automatically if the function
was turned on at the completion of the last trip.
Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel move-
ments. Vehicle control could be lost. There is
a risk of accident. Adjust the steering wheel
while the vehicle is stationary only.
Memory function
Principle
Manual steering wheel adjustment
The following settings can be stored and, if
necessary, retrieved using the memory func-
tion:
▷
▷
▷
Seat position.
Exterior mirror adjustment.
Height of the Head-up display.
General information
Two memory locations with different settings
can be set for each driver profile.
1. Fold the lever down completely.
2. Grip the steering wheel with both hands
and move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat posi-
tion.
The following settings are not stored:
▷
▷
Backrest width.
Lumbar support.
3. Fold the lever back up.
Steering wheel heating
Overview
Safety information
Warning
Using the memory function while driving can
lead to unexpected seat or steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost.
There is a risk of accident. Only retrieve the
memory function when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Button for steering wheel heating
104
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
CONTROLS
Seat climate control
Warning
There is a danger of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the seat is clear prior to any
adjustment.
Various climate control functions are available
for the seats.
Additional information:
Climate control, refer to page 220.
Overview
The memory buttons are located on the front
doors.
Storing settings
1. Set the desired position.
2.
Press the button. The LED illumi-
nates.
3. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
while the LED is illuminated. A signal
sounds.
Calling up settings
Press the desired memory button 1 or 2.
The stored position is called up.
The procedure stops when a seat setting
switch or one of the memory buttons is
pressed again.
The adjustment of the seat position on the
driver's side is interrupted after a short time
while driving.
105
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Transporting children safely
Vehicle features and options
Warning
Exposure to intense sunlight can cause child
restraint systems and their components to
become very hot. Persons may sustain burn
injuries when touching the hot components.
There is a risk of injury. Do not expose
the child restraint system to direct sunlight
or cover where necessary. If necessary, let
the child restraint system cool down before
transporting a child. Do not leave children un-
attended in the vehicle.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
The right place for children
Safety information
Warning
Children in the rear seat
General information
Accident research shows that the safest place
for children is in the rear seat.
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
Children younger than 13 years of age or
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be transported
in the rear seat in suitable child restraint sys-
tems designed for the age, weight and size
of the child. Children 13 years of age or older
must wear a seat belt as soon as a suitable
child restraint system can no longer be used
due to their age, weight, or size.
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Safety information
Warning
The seat belt cannot be fastened correctly
on children shorter than 5 ft/150 cm without
suitable additional child restraint systems.
The protective effect of safety gear, including
seat belts, can be limited or lost when seat
belts are fastened incorrectly. An incorrectly
fastened seat belt can cause additional inju-
ries, for instance in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life. Secure children
Warning
A hot vehicle may result in death to persons,
especially children, or animals. There is a
risk of injury or danger to life. Do not leave
people, especially children, or animals unat-
tended in the vehicle.
106
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
shorter than 5 ft/150 cm using suitable child
restraint systems.
Safety information
Warning
Children on the front passenger
seat
The protective effect of child restraint sys-
tems and their fastening systems which have
been damaged or exposed to an accident
can be limited or lost. A child cannot be prop-
erly restrained in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk
of injury or danger to life.
General information
Before using a child restraint system on the
front passenger seat, ensure that the front,
knee, and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Do not use child restraint systems which
have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
dent.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 157.
If attachment systems have been damaged
or strained by an accident, have them
checked and replaced by an authorized serv-
ice center or another qualified service center
or repair shop.
Safety information
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Installing child restraint
systems
General information
Pay attention to the specifications and the op-
erating and safety information of the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using child restraint systems.
On the front passenger seat
Deactivating the airbags
Warning
Active front passenger airbags can injure a
child in a child restraint system when the air-
bags are deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the front passenger airbags
107
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
are deactivated and that the PASSENGER
AIRBAG OFF indicator light illuminates.
Child seat security
Before installing a child restraint system in the
front passenger seat, make sure that the front,
knee and side airbags on the passenger's side
are deactivated.
Additional information:
For automatic deactivation of front passenger
airbags, refer to page 157.
The seat belts in the rear and the front pas-
senger seat belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Seat position and height
After installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go and, if possible, bring it up to the highest
position. This seat position and height ensure
the best possible position for the belt and of-
fers optimal protection in the event of an acci-
dent.
Locking the seat belt
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
2. Secure the child restraint system with the
seat belt.
After mounting a universal child restraint sys-
tem, adjust the tilt of the seat backrest so that
the belt is not constrained.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and pull
it tight against the child restraint system.
The seat belt is disabled.
If the upper attachment point of the seat belt
is located in front of the belt guide of the child
restraint seat, move the front passenger seat
carefully forward until the best possible belt
guide position is reached.
Unlocking the seat belt
1. Unbuckle the seat belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com-
pletely.
Backrest width
Adjustable backrest width: Before installing a
child restraint system on the front passenger
seat, open the backrest width completely. Do
not change the backrest width again and do
not call up a memory position.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil-
dren.
Pay attention to the specifications, operating
tips and safety instructions from the child re-
straint system manufacturer when selecting,
installing, and using LATCH child restraint fix-
ing systems.
108
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Position
Mounts for lower anchors
Icon
Meaning
General information
The lower anchors may be used to attach the
CRS to the vehicle seat up to a combined child
and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg when the child
is restrained by the internal harnesses.
The corresponding icon shows
the mounts for the lower
LATCH anchors.
Seats equipped with lower
mountings are marked with a
pair (2) of LATCH icons.
Safety information
For vehicles equipped with a
middle seat:
Warning
If the lower anchors on child restraint system
are not engaged correctly, the child restraint
system will not be able to provide suitable
protection. There is a risk of injury or danger
to life. Make sure that the lower mountings
are correctly engaged and that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the back-
rest.
It is not recommended to use
the inner lower mountings of
standard outer LATCH posi-
tions to fasten a child restraint
system on the middle seat.
Use the vehicle seat belt in-
stead for the middle seat.
Before attaching child restraint
systems
Pull the seat belt away from the area of the
child seat mountings.
Warning
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points.
Installing child restraint systems
1. Mount child restraint system, see manufac-
turer's information.
2. Make sure that the child restraint system
mount is correctly engaged in the lower an-
chor on both sides.
Child restraint systems with
tether strap
General information
When attaching child restraint systems to the
upper attachment points, observe the specifi-
cations and the operating and safety informa-
tion of the child restraint system manufacturer.
109
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
Safety information
Attachment points for upper
retaining strap
Warning
Icon
Meaning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly used
for the child restraint system, the protective
effect is reduced. There is a risk of injury. En-
sure that the upper retaining strap is guided
to the upper attachment point without twist-
ing and not over sharp edges.
The respective icon shows the
attachment point for the upper
retaining strap. Seats with an
upper top tether are marked
with this icon. It is located on
the rear seat backrest, the rear
shelf or the rear seat.
Warning
Routing the retaining strap
If the rear seat backrest is not locked, the
protective effect of the child restraint system
is limited or nonexistant. In certain situations,
for instance braking maneuvers or in case of
an accident, the rear seat backrest can fold
forward. There is a risk of injury or danger to
life. Make sure that the rear seat backrests
are locked.
Warning
1
Driving direction
Head restraint
The mounts for the lower mountings and at-
tachment points of the child restraint system
are intended for attaching child restraint sys-
tems only. If other objects are attached, the
mounts or attachment points can be dam-
aged. There is a risk of injury or risk of dam-
age to property. Only attach child restraint
systems at the corresponding mounts for the
lower mountings or attachment points.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Hook for upper retaining strap
Attachment point
Rear shelf
Seat backrest
Upper retaining strap
Attaching the upper retaining strap
to the attachment point
1. Open the attachment point cover.
2. If necessary, raise the head restraint.
3. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint mounts or along both
sides of the head restraint to the attach-
ment point.
110
Transporting children safely
CONTROLS
4. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to the
attachment point.
5. Tighten the retaining strap.
111
Driving
CONTROLS
Driving
stop, for instance in traffic jam or at traffic
lights. Drive-ready state remains switched on.
The engine starts automatically for driving off.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
General information
After each engine start using the Start/Stop
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is ready.
Additional information:
The function is activated at low speeds.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Engine stop
Start/Stop button
Functional requirements
The engine is switched off automatically when
stopping under the following conditions:
Principle
Pressing the Start/Stop button switches drive-
ready state on or off.
▷
The selector lever is in selector lever posi-
tion D.
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed while
the vehicle is at a standstill or the vehicle is
held by Automatic Hold.
General information
Drive-ready state is switched on when you de-
press the brake pedal while pressing the Start/
Stop button.
▷
The driver's seat belt is buckled or the driv-
er's door is closed.
Pressing the Start/Stop button again switches
the drive-ready state back off and standby
state is switched back on.
Manual engine stop
If the engine was not switched off automati-
cally when the vehicle stopped, the engine can
be switched off manually:
Additional information:
▷
▷
Drive-ready state, refer to page 41.
Standby state, refer to page 41.
▷
Depress the brake pedal forcefully again
from the current pedal position.
Driving off
▷
Engage selector lever position P.
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
2. Apply gear position.
3. Driving off.
When all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
the engine switches off.
Air conditioning system when the
engine is switched off
The air flow from the air conditioning system is
reduced when the engine is switched off.
Auto Start/Stop function
Principle
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save fuel.
The system switches off the engine during a
112
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
By releasing the brake pedal.
Display in the instrument cluster
When Automatic Hold is activated: step on
the accelerator pedal.
The display in the instrument
cluster indicates that the Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
an automatic engine start.
Driving off
Accelerating as usual after starting the engine.
Functional limitations
Safety mode
The engine is not switched off automatically in
the following situations:
After the engine switches off automatically, it
will not start again automatically if any one of
the following conditions are met:
▷
▷
In case of a steep downhill grade.
▷
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is open.
The brake pedal was not depressed hard
enough.
▷
Hood was unlocked.
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the ambient temperature is high and
automatic climate control is switched on.
Some indicator lights illuminate for a varied
length of time.
The vehicle interior has not yet been
heated or cooled as desired.
The engine can only be started via the Start/
Stop button.
When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
System limits
Even if driving off was not intended, the deac-
tivated engine starts up automatically in the
following situations:
Engine or other parts are not at operating
temperature.
▷
▷
Engine cooling is required.
The wheels are at a sharp angle or the
steering wheel is being turned.
▷
▷
▷
▷
With excessive warming of the interior
when cooling is turned on.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle battery is heavily discharged.
At higher elevations.
With excessive cooling of the interior when
heating is turned on.
Hood is unlocked.
When window condensation is possible and
automatic climate control is switched on.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is acti-
vated.
Without mild hybrid technology:
In case of a steering operation.
▷
▷
▷
▷
For stop-and-go traffic.
Selector lever in position N, S, or R.
After driving in reverse.
▷
▷
▷
When changing selector lever position from
D or P.
Using fuel with high ethanol content.
In case of seriously discharged vehicle bat-
tery.
Starting the engine
When starting an oil level measurement.
Functional requirements
The engine starts automatically under the fol-
lowing preconditions:
Deactivating the system manually
Principle
The engine is not automatically switched off.
113
Driving
CONTROLS
The engine is started during an automatic en-
gine stop.
Switching off the vehicle during an
automatic engine stop
If the engine stops automatically, the vehicle
can be parked safely, for example to leave it.
Without mild hybrid technology: via
button
1. Press the Start/Stop button.
▷
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Standby state is switched on.
Selector lever position P is engaged au-
tomatically.
2. Set the parking brake.
Automatic deactivation
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop func-
tion is deactivated automatically for safety rea-
sons, for instance if no driver is detected.
Press the button.
▷
LED is illuminated: Auto Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
▷
LED off: Auto Start/Stop function is ena-
bled.
Malfunction
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer
switches off the engine automatically. A Check
Control message is displayed. You may con-
tinue driving. Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Without mild hybrid technology: via
iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "Auto Start/Stop"
6. Select the desired setting.
Steptronic transmission
Principle
The Steptronic transmission is the vehicle's
automatic transmission. With shift paddles, it
offers the option of manual shifting if needed.
Via selector lever position
The Auto Start/Stop function is also disabled
in selector lever position S.
Safety information
Via the Driving Experience Control
The Auto Start/Stop function is also deacti-
vated in SPORT driving mode of the Driving
Experience Control.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving your vehicle, secure it against
rolling away, e.g., by applying the parking
brake.
114
Driving
CONTROLS
Selector lever positions
Engaging selector lever positions
Gear position D
General information
Selector lever position for normal driving. All
gears for forward travel are activated automat-
ically.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a gear position or reverse, main-
tain pressure on the brake pedal until you are
ready to drive off.
R reverse
Functional requirements
Engage selector lever position R only when the
vehicle is stationary.
Only when the drive-ready state is switched on
and the brake pedal is depressed is it possible
to change from selector lever position P to an-
other selector lever position.
N Neutral
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without
power, for instance in car washes, in selector
lever position N.
The selection lever position P cannot be
changed until all technical prerequisites are
met.
Parking position P
Engaging selector lever position D, N,
R
General information
Selector lever position, for instance for parking
the vehicle. The transmission blocks the drive
in selector lever position P.
1. Fasten driver's seat belt.
2. Tilt or pull the selector lever into the desired
direction, past a resistance point, if needed.
The selector lever automatically returns to
the center position when released.
Engage selector lever position P only when the
vehicle is stationary.
P is engaged automatically
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally in situations such as the following:
▷
▷
▷
After drive-ready state is switched off, if se-
lector lever position R, D, or S is engaged.
After standby is switched off, if selector
lever position N is engaged.
The driver's seat belt is unbuckled and the
driver's door is opened while the vehicle is
stationary and selector lever position D, S,
or R is engaged.
Engaging selector lever position P
Press the button.
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that se-
lector lever position P is engaged and the
parking brake is engaged. Otherwise, the vehi-
cle may begin to move.
The parking brake is engaged and the
transmission lock is set.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 121.
115
Driving
CONTROLS
If the system is not operational, you may not
be able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock, if
needed.
Additional information:
Electronic unlocking of the transmission lock,
refer to page 117.
Kickdown
Press button P.
Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driving
performance.
The transmission lock is engaged.
Step on the accelerator pedal beyond the re-
sistance point at the full throttle position.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle
General information
In some situations, the vehicle is supposed to
roll without its own power for a short distance,
for instance in a car wash or to be pushed.
S Sport mode
Principle
The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for sportier han-
dling. The transmission, for instance shifts up
later and the shifting times are shorter.
Engaging selector lever position N
NOTICE
Activating the Sport program
Selector lever position P is automatically en-
gaged when standby state is switched off.
The wheels are blocked. There is a risk
of damage to property. Do not switch off
standby if the vehicle is meant to coast, e.g.,
in a car wash.
1. Switch on drive-ready state while pressing
on the brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake and
switch off Automatic Hold.
Pull the selector lever from selector lever posi-
tion D to D/S.
3. Depress the brake pedal.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance S1.
4. Engage selector lever position N.
5. Switch off drive-ready state.
The sport program of the transmission is acti-
vated.
In this way, standby state remains switched
on, and a Check Control message is dis-
played.
Ending the Sport program
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
The vehicle can roll.
Selector lever position P is engaged automati-
cally after approximately 35 minutes.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
116
Driving
CONTROLS
Even in manual mode, the transmission shifts
automatically in certain situations, e.g., when
speed limits are reached.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is
displayed, for example P.
Temporary manual mode
In selector lever position D, pulling a shift pad-
dle switches into manual mode temporarily.
The engaged gear is also displayed in the in-
strument cluster, for instance D1.
Electronic unlocking of the
transmission lock
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift
paddles for a certain amount of time, the
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
General information
Unlock the transmission lock electroni-
cally, e.g., to maneuver the vehicle out of a
hazardous area in the event of a malfunction.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
Before unlocking the transmission lock, secure
the vehicle against rolling away, for instance
with a wheel chock.
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until D is
displayed in the instrument cluster.
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Engaging selector lever position N
1. Quickly press the Start/Stop button three
times without stepping on the brake.
Continuous manual mode
In Sport program S, pulling a shift paddle
switches to manual mode M permanently.
2. Depress the brake pedal.
3. Press the selector lever to position N.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
An appropriate Check Control message is
displayed.
It is possible to switch into automatic mode:
Position N is indicated on the selector lever.
▷
▷
▷
Pull and hold the right shift paddle until S is
displayed on the instrument cluster.
4. Maneuver the vehicle from the hazardous
area and secure it against rolling away.
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
Shift paddles
Pull the selector lever to D/S.
When M2 is set manually while the vehicle is
stationary, the transmission will no longer shift
back to M1. This shift behavior is maintained
until M1 is engaged manually or manual mode
M is exited.
Principle
The shift paddles on the steering wheel are
used to change gears manually.
General information
Shifting
The vehicle only shifts at suitable RPM and
road speeds.
117
Driving
CONTROLS
Shifting
Launch Control
Principle
Launch Control enables optimum acceleration
on roads with good traction under dry sur-
rounding conditions.
General information
Using Launch Control causes premature com-
ponent wear since this function represents a
very heavy load for the vehicle.
▷
▷
Upshifting: pull the right shift paddle.
Downshifting: pull left shift paddle.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driving off
with Launch Control.
The selected gear is briefly displayed in the in-
strument cluster, followed by the current gear.
Do not use Launch Control when breaking in
the vehicle.
Advanced mode
Additional information:
Break-in, refer to page 248.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Step-
tronic Sport transmission offers an advanced
mode with adapted shift characteristics.
Functional requirement
Launch Control can be used when the engine
is at operating temperature. The engine is at
operating temperature after an uninterrupted
trip of at least 6 miles/10 km.
▷
▷
▷
Automatic downshift to lowest possible
gear.
If the left shift paddle is pulled and held, the
Steptronic transmission automatically shifts
down to the lowest possible gear.
Driving off with Launch Control
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Avoid automatic upshifting in manual
mode.
2.
Press the button.
In manual mode, the Steptronic transmis-
sion does not shift up automatically when
speed limits are reached.
3. Activate TRACTION on the control display.
4. Engage selector lever position S.
There is no downshifting for kickdown.
5. With the left foot, press down forcefully on
the brake.
Enabling advanced mode
Advanced mode is active in manual mode.
6. Press and hold down the accelerator pedal
beyond the resistance point at the full throt-
tle position, kickdown.
"SPORT": The driving mode must be selected
and configured depending on vehicle equip-
ment.
A destination flag is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
118
Driving
CONTROLS
7. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
briefly until the engine speed is constant.
Keep the accelerator pedal in this position.
Activating
1. Keep the left shift paddle pulled until
SPRINT is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
8. Release the brake within 3 seconds after
the destination flag illuminates.
▷
The transmission shifts down to the
lowest possible gear and switches to
manual operation M.
The vehicle accelerates.
Upshifting occurs automatically as long as
the destination flag is displayed and the ac-
celerator pedal is not released.
▷
A dynamic setting has been activated
for the drivetrain.
2. Change gears manually.
Repeated use during a trip
After Launch Control has been used, the trans-
mission must cool down for a short time before
Launch Control can be used again. Launch
Control adjusts to the surrounding conditions
when used again.
Automatic deactivation
The Sprint function is ended automatically
when driving moderately for a defined period
of time.
Manual deactivation
After using Launch Control
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
▷
Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
SPRINT is no longer displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
▷
▷
In addition to the pulled right shift paddle,
pull the left shift paddle.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to achieve
better acceleration values in DSC OFF without
Launch Control mode.
Press the selector lever from selector lever
position S to D.
Driving Experience Control
Steptronic Sport
transmission: sprint function
Principle
The Driving Experience Control influences,
among other things, the vehicle's driving dy-
namics.
Principle
Depending on the equipment, the Sprint func-
tion can be used for an upcoming acceleration
process. The Sprint function prepares the driv-
etrain for the acceleration process.
The vehicle can be adjusted depending on the
situation using various driving modes.
General information
The following systems may be affected, for in-
stance:
General information
When the Sprint function is activated, the re-
sponse characteristics of the vehicle will be-
come more dynamic.
▷
▷
▷
Drivetrain.
Chassis.
Steering.
119
Driving
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Display in the instrument cluster.
Cruise control.
Driving modes in detail
COMFORT
Overview
The COMFORT driving mode is a balanced
setting between sporty and consumption-opti-
mized driving.
Buttons in the vehicle
SPORT
The SPORT driving mode is a dynamic setting
for more agility with an optimized suspension.
SPORT PLUS
The SPORT PLUS driving mode is a dynamic
setting for maximum agility with an adjusted
drive.
Button
Driving mode
ECO PRO
In ECO PRO driving mode, consumption is op-
timized.
SPORT
SPORT PLUS
SPORT INDIVIDUAL
INDIVIDUAL configuration
COMFORT
General information
For some driving modes, there is another
mode that can be adjusted individually.
ECO PRO
ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL
The individual configuration set last is acti-
vated directly when the driving mode is called
up again.
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selected driving mode is
displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
Configuring and resetting
E.g., ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL drive mode:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
Activating/deactivating drive modes
Press the button for the desired drive mode
repeatedly until the desired drive mode is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL"
6. Select the desired setting.
When changing the drive mode, the current
drive mode is deactivated.
Reset ECO PRO INDIVIDUAL to the standard
settings:
"Reset to ECO PRO STANDARD"
120
Driving
CONTROLS
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
Enabling INDIVIDUAL
Press the button for the desired driving mode
several times.
Parking brake
Overview
Principle
Button in the vehicle
The parking brake is used to prevent the vehi-
cle from rolling away when it is parked.
Safety information
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
Parking brake
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
Setting the parking brake
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
The LED illuminates.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red.
The parking brake is set.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
While driving
Use while driving serves as an emergency
braking function.
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates red, a signal sounds,
and the brake lights illuminate.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
A Check Control message is displayed.
121
Driving
CONTROLS
The parking brake is engaged when the vehi-
cle is stationary.
The indicator light is no longer illumi-
nated as soon as the parking brake is
ready for operation again.
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing the parking brake manually
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Automatic Hold
Principle
Automatic Hold assists the driver by automati-
cally setting and releasing the brake such as
when moving in stop-and-go traffic.
2.
Press the switch while stepping on
the brake pedal or selector lever position P
is set.
The vehicle is automatically held in place when
it is stationary.
The LED and the indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released.
On uphill grades the system prevents the vehi-
cle from rolling back when driving off.
Releasing the parking brake
automatically
The parking brake is released automatically
when you drive off.
General information
The parking brake is automatically engaged
under the following conditions:
The LED and the indicator light go out.
▷
▷
Drive-ready state is switched off.
Malfunction
If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, se-
cure the vehicle so that it does not roll away
before you exit.
The driver's door is opened while the vehi-
cle is stationary.
▷
The moving vehicle is brought to a stand-
still using the parking brake.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Safety information
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for in-
stance with a wheel chock, after getting out of
the vehicle.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
After a power interruption
To reestablish parking brake operability after
a power interruption, an initialization may be
required.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
1. Turn on standby state.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
2.
Pull the switch while stepping on the
brake pedal or selector lever position P is
set and then push.
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
This process may take a few seconds. Some
mechanical sounds associated with this proc-
ess are normal.
122
Driving
CONTROLS
Activating Automatic Hold
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
Warning
Unattended children or animals in the vehicle
can cause the vehicle to move and endanger
themselves and traffic, for example, due to
the following actions:
2.
Press the button.
The LED illuminates.
▷
▷
▷
Pressing the Start/Stop button.
Releasing the parking brake.
The indicator light illuminates green.
Automatic Hold is activated.
Opening and closing the doors or win-
dows.
After every vehicle restart, the last se-
lected setting is active.
▷
▷
Engaging selector lever position N.
Using vehicle equipment.
Automatic Hold holding the vehicle
Automatic Hold is activated and the driver’s
door is closed.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do not
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Take the vehicle key with you when
exiting and lock the vehicle.
After stopping, the vehicle is automat-
ically secured against rolling away as
soon as the indicator light illuminates
green.
NOTICE
If the vehicle is stationary, Automatic Hold
engages the parking brake and prevents the
vehicle from rolling in a car wash. There is a
risk of damage to property. Deactivate Auto-
matic Hold prior to entering the car wash.
Driving off
Press the accelerator pedal to drive off.
The brake is released automatically and the
indicator light of the parking brake is no longer
illuminated.
Overview
Automatic parking brake application
The parking brake is automatically set if drive-
ready state is switched off while the vehicle is
being held by Automatic Hold or if the vehicle
is exited.
Button in the vehicle
The indicator light changes from green
to red.
The parking brake is not set automatically if
the drive-ready state was switched off while
the vehicle was coasting. Automatic Hold is
temporarily deactivated in this case.
Automatic Hold
123
Driving
CONTROLS
Deactivate Automatic Hold
Press the button.
The LED goes out.
The indicator light goes out.
Automatic Hold is switched off.
If the vehicle is being held by Automatic Hold,
also press on the brake pedal when switching
off.
124
Displays
CONTROLS
Displays
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Overview
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Instrument cluster
Principle
The instrument cluster comprises various digi-
tal displays, e.g., a speedometer, time, range,
temperature as well as indicator and warning
lights.
Instrument cluster
Display ranges on the instrument
cluster
General information
The layout of the instrument cluster adapts to
the respective driving mode. The positions of
some displays may vary, e.g., the selector lever
display.
Some of the displays in the instrument cluster
may differ from the illustrations in the Owner's
Manual.
1
Speedometer
Safety information
2
3
Driver assistance systems 182
Depending on the equipment: Driver Atten-
tion Camera
Warning
If the displays on the instrument cluster fail,
do not use the vehicle. There may be a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Im-
mediately park the vehicle in a safe manner.
Turning drive-ready state off and on again
may correct the malfunction, allowing you to
continue driving. If the malfunction cannot be
corrected, have the vehicle checked by an au-
4
Check Control 128
Selector lever display 114
Gear shift indicator 135
Selection lists 134
Using ECO PRO efficiently 255
Power gauge 135
5
Tachometer 136
125
Displays
CONTROLS
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
6
7
Engine temperature 136
Outside temperature 137
Central display range 138
Drive mode 119
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
8
9
10 Speed Limit Info 182
Speed Limit Assistant 196
11 Time 140
Settings
Specific displays can be configured individu-
ally, e.g., a second actual speed.
12 Fuel gauge 140
Range 141
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
Additional information:
4. "Instrument cluster"
5. Select the desired setting.
Indicator/warning lights, refer to page 129.
Operating elements on the steering
wheel
Live Vehicle
Operating
element
Function
Principle
Live Vehicle is a virtual representation of your
own vehicle with different information, e.g., ve-
hicle status or energy flow indicators.
Display the menu bar on the
instrument cluster.
Press the corresponding arrow
key to move the selection.
General information
Appropriate information is shown on the con-
trol display depending on the driving situation.
Fault statuses are not taken into account.
Turn knurled wheel: scroll se-
lection up or down.
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Adaptive content
The following content is displayed in alternat-
ing order and, if necessary, depending on the
selected drive mode:
Configuring the layout
In COMFORT drive mode, the layout in the in-
strument cluster can be individually configured
and displayed.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle status, refer to page 141.
Current driving condition, refer to page 142.
Sport displays, refer to page 142.
Driving style analysis, refer to page 256.
Trip data, refer to page 138.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Static information
The following information may be shown per-
manently on the control display regardless of
the driving situation and driving mode set.
2. "LAYOUT"
126
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Vehicle status.
Trip data.
Overview
Adjusting the display
In the Live Vehicle menu, you can choose be-
tween an adaptive display and static content.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
Head-up display views are projected onto the
windshield using protective glass. The protec-
tive glass is located between the steering
wheel and windshield.
5. Select the desired setting.
BMW Head-up display
Displayable information
The following information is displayed on the
Head-up display:
Principle
The Head-up display projects important infor-
mation, e.g., speed, onto the windshield in the
driver's field of view. Information can be re-
corded without you having to look away from
the road.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Vehicle speed.
Navigation instructions.
Check Control messages.
Sport displays.
The steering wheel buttons can be used to
configure various views for the Head-up dis-
play. Additional settings can be changed on
the control display, e.g., brightness or height.
Lists and messages.
Driver assistance systems.
Some of this information is only displayed
briefly as needed.
General information
Follow instructions for cleaning the Head-up
display in the Vehicle Care chapter.
Configuring a view
The views for the Head-up display can be set
independently of the display on the instrument
cluster, e.g., a reduced view.
Additional information:
Caring for special components, refer to
page 319.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
2. "HEAD-UP"
127
Displays
CONTROLS
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
Special windshield
The windshield is part of the system.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
The shape and coating of the special wind-
shield enable the system to function.
If damaged, have the special windshield re-
placed by an authorized service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop.
Turning the Head-up display on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Displays"
Check Control
4. "Head-up display"
5. "Head-up display"
Principle
The Check Control system monitors functions
in the vehicle and notifies you of faults in the
monitored systems.
Settings
Individual settings can be entered for the
Head-up display such as for the height, bright-
ness or illustration. In addition, individual dis-
plays in the Head-up display can be set up
separately such as for Driver Assistance.
A Check Control message is displayed as a
combination of indicator/warning lights and
text messages on the instrument cluster and,
if applicable, on the Head-up display. In addi-
tion, an acoustic signal may sound and a text
message may appear on the control display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Some Check Control messages are hidden au-
tomatically after approx. 20 seconds, but they
will be stored. Stored Check Control messages
can be displayed on the control display. Urgent
Check Control messages are permanently dis-
played but can be hidden temporarily.
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-up display"
5. Select the desired setting.
Visibility of the display
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
display is influenced by the following factors:
Hiding Check Control messages
▷
▷
Seat position.
Permanently displayed Check Control mes-
sages can be hidden temporarily. These mes-
sages are automatically displayed again after
approx. 8 seconds.
Objects on the Head-up display's protective
glass.
▷
Dust or dirt on the Head-up display's pro-
tective glass.
An arrow icon next to the Check Control
message indicates whether the Check Control
message can be hidden.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Windshield dirty on inside or outside.
Sunglasses with certain polarization filters.
Wet road.
To hide Check Control messages, press
the left arrow button on the steering
wheel.
Unfavorable light conditions.
If the image is distorted, have the basic set-
tings checked by an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
128
Displays
CONTROLS
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
Additional information such as the cause of a
fault or the required action can be called up via
Check Control.
Indicator lights and warning
lights
Principle
The indicator lights and the warning lights
on the instrument cluster show the status of
some functions in the vehicle. The indicator
and warning lights indicate faults in monitored
systems.
Depending on the Check Control message, fur-
ther help can be selected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
General information
Indicator lights and warning lights can illumi-
nate in a variety of combinations and colors.
4. "Check Control"
5. Select the desired text message.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and illuminate temporarily when
drive-ready state is turned on.
Display
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster as a text message with an
icon.
Red lights
For urgent messages, an added text is auto-
matically displayed on the control display.
Seat belt reminder
If several faults occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
Seat belt on the driver's seat is not
buckled.
Certain messages displayed while driving are
displayed again after drive-ready state is
switched off.
Additional information:
Seat belt reminder, refer to page 98.
Icons in the instrument cluster indicate
an active or saved Check Control mes-
sage.
Airbag system
Warning light illuminates briefly: Indi-
cates that the entire airbag system and
seat belt tensioners are operational
when drive-ready state is switched on.
Warning light does not illuminate or illuminates
continuously: the airbag system or the seat
belt tensioners may be not be operational.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Airbags, refer to page 155.
129
Displays
CONTROLS
Parking brake
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Control
The parking brake is set.
Additional information:
Parking brake, refer to page 121.
Warning light flashes and acoustic sig-
nal sounds: Brake and evade as neces-
sary.
Additional information:
Brake system
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 189.
The brake pads are worn or there is
another issue with the brake system.
The braking assistance may not func-
tion. A higher pedal force may be re-
quired for braking.
Yellow lights
Antilock Braking System
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
The system may not be operational.
The Antilock Braking System is not
available.
The ability to steer may be restricted
during full braking.
Pedestrian Warning
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion with a person, e.g., a pedestrian
or a cyclist. Increased awareness is re-
quired.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Additional information:
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a person, e.g., a pe-
destrian or a cyclist. Immediately initiate brak-
ing or an evasive maneuver.
Antilock Braking System, refer to page 178.
Dynamic Stability Control
Additional information:
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce the vehicle speed and adjust your driv-
ing style to the road conditions.
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, refer
to page 163.
Forward Collision Warning
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Stability
Control has malfunctioned or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has failed.
Warning light illuminates: risk of colli-
sion, e.g., with a vehicle, is detected.
Increased awareness is required.
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Warning light flashes and a signal sounds: risk
of imminent collision with a vehicle detected.
Immediately initiate braking or an evasive ma-
neuver.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 179.
Forward Collision Warning with braking func-
tion, refer to page 163.
130
Displays
CONTROLS
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop as needed.
The Dynamic Stability Control
deactivated or the Dynamic Traction
Control activated
▷
Malfunction: have the vehicle checked by
an authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated
or Dynamic Traction Control is acti-
vated.
Additional information:
Tire pressure monitor, refer to page 277.
Additional information:
▷
▷
Dynamic Stability Control, refer to page 179.
Steering system
Dynamic Traction Control, refer to
page 180.
The steering system may not be op-
erational.
Flat tire monitor
Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Reduce your speed and stop cau-
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers.
Emissions
▷
The warning light illuminates:
Additional information:
Worsening emissions, e.g., due to
an incorrectly fitted fuel cap. Have
the vehicle checked as soon as pos-
sible.
Flat tire monitor, refer to page 284.
Tire pressure monitor
▷
The warning light flashes under certain cir-
cumstances:
Warning light illuminates: Flat tire or
tire pressure loss has been detected.
Follow the information in the Check
Control message.
This indicates that there is excessive misfir-
ing in the engine.
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the ve-
hicle checked immediately; otherwise, se-
rious engine misfiring within a brief pe-
riod can seriously damage emission control
components, in particular the catalytic con-
verter.
Warning light flashes then illuminates continu-
ously: Flat tires or tire pressure losses cannot
be detected.
▷
▷
▷
Fault caused by systems or devices with
the same radio frequency: after leaving the
area of the interference, the system auto-
matically becomes active again.
Have the vehicle checked by an authorized
service center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
In the case of tires with special appro-
val: the tire pressure monitor was unable
to complete the reset. Reset the system
again.
Additional information:
Socket for OBD on-board diagnostics, refer to
page 303.
Wheel without wheel electronics installed:
Have it checked by an authorized service
131
Displays
CONTROLS
warnings. The system can perform steering in-
terventions.
Green lights
Turn signal
Indicator light flashes: the system is perform-
ing a steering intervention.
Turn signal is on.
Additional information:
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
light indicates that a turn signal bulb
Lane departure warning, refer to page 165.
has failed.
Additional information:
Automatic Hold: vehicle is held
automatically
Turn signal, refer to page 144.
Automatic Hold is ready to use. The
vehicle is automatically held in place
when it is stationary.
Parking lights
Parking lights are switched on.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Automatic Hold, refer to page 122.
Parking lights, low beams, refer to
page 147.
Automatic Hold: vehicle secured
against rolling away
Low beams
The vehicle is automatically secured
against rolling away after stopping.
Low beams are switched on.
Additional information:
Additional information:
Parking lights, low beams, refer to
page 147.
Automatic Hold, refer to page 122.
Manual Speed Limiter
Automatic High Beam Assistant
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on.
Low beams are switched on and the
Automatic High Beam Assistant is acti-
vated.
The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
High beams are switched on and off automati-
cally depending on the traffic situation.
Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to page 184.
Additional information:
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 145.
Cruise Control
The system is active.
Lane departure warning
Additional information:
Depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version:
Cruise control, refer to page 186.
The indicator light illuminates: the sys-
tem is switched on. At least one lane boundary
has been detected on one side of the vehicle.
The system is ready to intervene and issue
132
Displays
CONTROLS
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Control
Gray lights
Seat belt reminder
Indicator light illuminates: Vehicle has
been detected ahead of you. The vehi-
cle icon goes out if no vehicle has been
detected ahead of you.
Seat belt on the passenger seat or an-
other seat in the vehicle is not buckled.
Additional information:
Indicator lamp is flashing: vehicle ahead is
driving off.
Seat belts, refer to page 97.
Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 189.
The system is interrupted.
Additional information:
Manual Speed Limiter, refer to
page 184.
Speed Limit Assistant activated
Depending on vehicle equipment, the
indicator light illuminates green, to-
gether with the icon for a cruise control
system. Speed Limit Assistant is active and
detected speed limits can be applied manually
for the displayed system.
Cruise Control
The system is interrupted.
Additional information:
Cruise control, refer to page 186.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 196.
Active Cruise Control with Distance
Control
Speed Limit Assist: Apply speed limit
Indicator light is illuminated: the system
is interrupted.
The detected speed limit can be ap-
plied with the SET button. As soon as
the speed limit has been applied, a
green checkmark is displayed.
Indicator light flashes: Conditions are
not adequate for the system to work. The sys-
tem was deactivated but applies the brakes
until you actively resume control by pressing
on the brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Additional information:
Speed Limit Assistant, refer to page 196.
Additional information:
Blue lights
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 189.
High beams
High beams have been switched on.
Additional information:
White lights
Cruise Control with Distance Control
▷
High beams, refer to page 144.
No Distance Control displayed since
the accelerator pedal is being pressed.
▷
Automatic High Beam Assistant, refer to
page 145.
Additional information:
133
Displays
CONTROLS
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control, re-
fer to page 189.
Display
Selection lists
Principle
Lists can be displayed and, if necessary, used
for certain functions in the instrument cluster or
the Head-up display.
Selection lists, e.g., entertainment sources, are
displayed on the instrument cluster.
▷
▷
▷
Entertainment source.
Current audio source.
List of most recent telephone calls.
Example: selecting a radio station
If necessary, the corresponding menu will open
on the control display.
1.
Press the entertainment sources
button.
Displaying and using the list
The selection lists can be displayed and op-
erated using the operating elements on the
steering wheel.
2.
To switch to the radio stations list,
tilt the knurled wheel to the right.
Control ele- Function
ments
3. Turn the knurled wheel to select a radio
station.
4. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected radio station.
Turn the knurled wheel: display
the entertainment list or scroll
up or down in the list.
Example: changing the entertainment
source
Press knurled wheel: confirm
selection.
Press the corresponding arrow
key to change the entertain-
ment source.
1.
Press the entertainment sources
button.
Show list of most recent tele-
phone calls.
2.
To select an entertainment source,
turn the knurled wheel.
3. Press the knurled wheel to confirm the se-
lected entertainment source.
134
Displays
CONTROLS
Enabling/disabling the power gauge
The power display or tachometer is shown de-
pending on the driving mode selected or the
individual configuration of the layout.
Gear shift indicator
Principle
The shift point indicator recommends the gear
that best suits the current driving situation. Us-
ing the optimal gear supports an efficient driv-
ing style.
Display
General information
The gear shift indicator is active in manual
mode M depending on vehicle equipment and
national-market version.
Displays
Information on upshifting, downshifting, or en-
gaged gear is displayed on the instrument
cluster.
Needle in range of arrow 1: display for energy
recovery such as while decelerating CHARGE.
Needle in range of arrow 2: the drive power in
percent, POWER.
On vehicles without a gear shift indicator, the
engaged gear is displayed.
Example Description
Reduced drive power
The available power may be reduced due to
certain factors. The power gauge is automati-
cally adjusted accordingly.
In continuous manual mode M:
Optimal gear is engaged.
With shift paddles: temporary
manual mode.
In addition, the icons on the power gauge and
tachometer indicate reduced drive power.
With shift paddles: Sport program.
Shift information.
Additional information:
Shift paddles, refer to page 117.
Power gauge
Principle
The power gauge indicates the currently
drawn drive power as a percentage.
135
Displays
CONTROLS
Icon
Description
Standby state and drive-
ready state
Blue icon: cold drivetrain.
White icon: increased drive sys-
tem temperature, for instance
due to sustained or high
power demand when driving
on mountain roads.
OFF is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. Drive-ready state
is turned off and standby state
turned on.
Depending on vehicle equip-
ment and national-market ver-
sion:
READY is displayed in the
instrument cluster. The Auto
Start/Stop function is ready for
automatic engine start.
Drive power limitation defined
via the BMW Digital Key.
System-related functional limi-
tation.
Additional information:
▷
Operating condition of the vehicle, refer to
page 40.
A Check Control message is
displayed in addition where ap-
plicable.
▷
Auto Start/Stop function, refer to page 112.
Engine temperature
Tachometer
▷
Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
General information
Always avoid RPM in the red warning field. In
this range, the fuel supply is reduced to protect
the engine.
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
Activating/deactivating the
tachometer
The tachometer is displayed depending on the
selected drive mode or the individually config-
ured layout.
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
The tachometer display changes depending
on the selected driving mode.
Reduced engine speed range
Additional information:
The available engine speed range may be re-
duced due certain factors such as a cold drive
system. The tachometer display is automati-
cally adjusted depending on the available en-
gine speed range.
Coolant level, refer to page 299.
136
Displays
CONTROLS
to the weather conditions at low tempera-
tures.
Display
▷
Cold engine: the needle
is in the blue temperature
range, close to the stop of
the temperature display, and
the word WARM-UP is dis-
played.
Shift lights
Principle
Drive at moderate RPM and
vehicle speeds.
Shift lights indicate the suitable upshift point at
which optimal acceleration can be achieved.
▷
▷
Normal operating temperature: the needle
is in the middle or in the left half of the
temperature display.
General information
The shift lights are active in manual mode M
and can be displayed on the instrument cluster
or on the Head-up display in combination with
the tachometer.
Hot engine: the needle is in the red temper-
ature range. In addition, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Additional information:
Functional requirements
Coolant level, refer to page 299.
▷
"SPORT": The driving mode must be se-
lected depending on vehicle equipment.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
▷
To display the shift lights on the Head-up
display, select Sport view.
A red indicator light is displayed.
▷
▷
Manual mode M must be activated.
Advanced mode must be activated.
Additional information:
Advanced mode, refer to page 118.
Outside temperature
Display
General information
If the indicator drops to +37℉/+3℃ or lower, a
signal sounds.
A Check Control message is displayed.
There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
Safety information
Warning
Successive fields illuminating yellow indicate
an upcoming shift point.
Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
there is a risk of icy roads, for instance on
bridges or shady sections of the road. There
is a risk of accident. Modify your driving style
137
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Shift when all fields illuminate red at the
latest.
A menu bar is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
When the maximum RPM is reached, the
entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is interrupted in order to protect the en-
gine.
2. "CONTENT"
Select the menu using the arrow buttons on
the steering wheel where applicable.
3. Select the desired setting using the thumb-
wheel on the steering wheel.
Central display range
Trip data
Displayable content
The following settings can be selected:
Principle
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Reduced display.
The trip data display provides various informa-
tion about the trip, e.g., average consumption
or trip distance.
Trip data, refer to page 138.
Navigation system route preview.
Navigation system map view.
G-Meter, refer to page 140.
Entertainment.
General information
The trip data can be displayed on the control
display and in the instrument cluster.
Android Auto©.
Depending on the setting in the Live Vehicle
menu, the trip data is shown on the control
display.
Depending on vehicle equipment and na-
tional-market version, select functions of
a compatible smartphone can also be dis-
played, e.g., map views.
The values can be displayed and reset de-
pending on different intervals.
Some contents for the central display range
can also be configured as a view in the Head-
up display.
Display on the control display
Additional information:
General information
Head-up display, refer to page 127.
The following trip data is shown on the control
display:
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
▷
▷
Configured interval for displaying trip data.
Average fuel consumption depending
on the configured interval.
Configuring the central display
range
The content of the central display range on the
instrument cluster can be configured individu-
ally, for instance the trip data display.
▷
▷
▷
Travel time depending on the config-
ured interval.
Distance traveled depending on the
configured interval.
Distance traveled in Coasting mode.
1.
Press the button on the steering
wheel.
138
Displays
CONTROLS
Displaying trip data continuously
Adjusting the display of the trip data
The intervals for the display of the trip data
in the instrument cluster and on the control
display are adjustable.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Live Vehicle"
4. "Content"
5. "Trip data"
Using the button on the left steering column
switch:
1. Press the button.
The trip data is displayed.
Display in the instrument cluster
Information on consumption and distance cov-
ered can be displayed in the instrument clus-
ter.
2. Press button repeatedly until the desired
setting is displayed.
Via iDrive:
▷
▷
▷
Current consumption, arrow 1.
Average consumption, arrow 2.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Distance traveled depending on the config-
ured interval, arrow 3.
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Values"
The icon is displayed when the vehicle
is in Coasting mode.
6. Select the desired setting:
▷
Total mileage, arrow 4.
▷
▷
▷
▷
"Since start of trip ( )": the values are au-
tomatically reset approx. four hours af-
ter the vehicle has come to a standstill.
Current consumption
The current fuel consumption display allows
you to check the current fuel consumption, e.g.,
to drive economically and in an environmen-
tally-friendly manner.
"Since last refuel ( )": the values are au-
tomatically reset after refueling with a
larger quantity of fuel.
"Since factory": the values since the
time of the factory delivery are dis-
played.
Average consumption
The average fuel consumption is displayed de-
pending on how the intervals for displaying trip
data are configured.
"Since Individual ( )": the values since
the last manual reset are displayed. The
values can be reset at any time.
139
Displays
CONTROLS
The values are automatically reset whenever
you start a new drive.
Resetting average values manually
The following interval can be reset manually at
any time:
Additional information:
Central display area, refer to page 138
"Since Individual ( )"
Using the button on the left steering column
switch:
Manually reseting G-Meter values
1. Display the G-Meter on the instrument
cluster.
1. Press the button.
The trip data is displayed.
2.
Press and hold the thumbwheel on
the steering wheel until the values are re-
set.
Date and time
Various settings can be applied for the date
and time display such as the date format.
2. Press and hold the button until the values
are reset.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the time zone can be set and
automatic time setting can be activated. With
automatic time setting, the time, date and, if
necessary, the time zone are updated auto-
matically.
Via iDrive:
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Time period for trip data"
5. "Reset Individual"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Date and time"
5. Select the desired settings.
The average values and counters are reset.
Once the average values and counters have
been reset, the following interval is automati-
cally activated:
"Since Individual ( )"
Fuel gauge
Principle
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
played.
G-Meter
General information
The G-Meter indicates the forces that are ap-
plied in longitudinal and transverse direction
on the vehicle occupants while driving.
General information
Vehicle inclination may cause the display to
vary.
The display can be configured on the central
display range of the instrument cluster.
Additional information:
140
Displays
CONTROLS
Refueling, refer to page 260.
Safety information
Display
NOTICE
An arrow beside the fuel pump
With a range below 30 miles/50 km, the
engine may no longer have sufficient fuel.
Engine functions are not ensured anymore.
There is a risk of damage to property. Refuel
promptly.
icon shows which side of the ve-
hicle the fuel filler flap is on.
The current range is displayed
as numerical value.
Indicator light in the instrument
cluster
Display
The current range is displayed
as a numerical value next to the
fuel gauge.
The yellow indicator light illuminates,
once the fuel reserve is reached.
Range
Setting the units of
measurement
Principle
The range indicates the distance that can still
be covered with the current tank of fuel.
Depending on the national-market version, you
can set the units of measurement for some
values, for instance consumption, distances,
and temperature.
General information
The estimated range with remaining fuel is
permanently displayed on the instrument clus-
ter.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
With a low remaining range, a Check Control
message is briefly displayed. A low remaining
range means that engine functions cannot al-
ways be ensured for sporty driving, e.g., when
cornering at speed.
3. "System settings"
4. "Units"
5. Select the desired setting.
The Check Control message appears
continuously below a range of approx.
30 miles/50 km.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems such as for Check
Control.
141
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation, refer to page 256.
Coasting, refer to page 257.
Displaying vehicle status
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Functional requirements
3. "Vehicle status"
▷
COMFORT or ECO PRO driving mode is se-
lected.
Overview
▷
The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
Icon
Description
"FLAT TIRE MONITOR": Sta-
tus of the flat tire monitor, refer
to page 284.
Display
"Tire Pressure Monitor": status
of the Tire Pressure Monitor,
refer to page 277.
"Engine oil level": electronic
oil measurement, refer to
page 297.
"Check Control": displaying
stored Check Control mes-
sages, refer to page 128.
An example:
The adaptive recuperation is active, arrow 1.
The vehicle battery is charged when the vehi-
cle decelerates, arrow 2.
"Required services": display of
the service notification, refer to
page 143.
Sport displays
Current driving condition
Principle
General information
The current driving condition is displayed dy-
namically while driving in the Live Vehicle
menu on the control display.
The Sport displays especially support a sporty
driving style.
Functional requirements
▷
SPORT driving mode is selected.
The following states can be displayed:
▷
The following setting is selected for Live
Vehicle:"Adaptive content"
▷
▷
▷
Driving.
Coasting mode: "EFFICIENT COASTING"
"CHARGING BATTERY"
Display
With mild hybrid technology:
The sport displays are displayed in the Live
Vehicle menu on the control display.
▷
▷
Adaptive recuperation.
Efficient rolling with engine switched off.
The following information is displayed:
Additional information:
142
Displays
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Torque.
4. "Required services"
5. "Vehicle inspection"
6. "Date:"
Power.
Boost pressure.
Engine oil temperature.
7. Select the desired setting.
Service notification
Principle
Service notifications indicate necessary main-
tenance measures.
General information
After turning on, the next service appointment
or the distance remaining until the next servic-
ing is displayed briefly on the instrument clus-
ter.
A Service Advisor can read out the mainte-
nance work from the vehicle key.
Display
More information on the maintenance meas-
ures required may be displayed on the control
display.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
4. "Required services"
Maintenance measures as well as legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
5. Select the desired entry.
Entering appointment dates
Dates for mandatory vehicle inspections can
be entered.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time are
set correctly.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Vehicle status"
143
Light and view
CONTROLS
Light and view
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "One-touch turn signal"
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
6. Select the desired setting.
Brief flashing
Press the lever to the resistance point and hold
it there for as long as you want the turn signal
to flash.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
High beams,
Turn signal
headlight flasher
Turn signal in exterior mirror
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
When driving and during operation of the turn
signals or hazard warning system, do not fold
in the exterior mirrors so that the turn signal
lamps on the exterior mirror are easy to see.
Flashing
▷
▷
High beams on, arrow 1.
The high beams illuminate when the low
beams are switched on.
High beams off/headlight flasher, arrow 2.
Press the lever past the resistance point.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates when the high
beams are turned on.
One-touch signaling
Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The one-touch signaling duration can be ad-
justed.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
144
Light and view
CONTROLS
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
Automatic High Beam
Assistant
The headlights are automatically changed be-
tween low beams and high beams.
Principle
The Automatic High Beam Assistant detects
other road users early on and automatically
switches the high beams on or off depending
on the traffic situation.
The blue indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminates when the sys-
tem switches on the high beams.
Interruption of the journey with activated Au-
tomatic High Beam Assistant: the Automatic
High Beam Assistant remains activated when
continuing the journey.
General information
The Automatic High Beam Assistant ensures
that the high beams are switched on, when-
ever the traffic situation allows. In the low
speed range, the high beams are not switched
on by the system.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant is de-
activated when manually switching the high
beams on and off.
The system responds to light from oncoming
traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, and to
ambient lighting, for instance in towns and cit-
ies.
To reactivate the Automatic High Beam Assis-
tant, press the button on the turn signal lever.
Deactivating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
The high beams can be switched on and off
manually at any time.
Functional requirements
▷
Automatic headlight control is activated.
▷
Low beams are switched on.
Activating Automatic High Beam
Assistant
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Sensitivity of the Automatic High
Beam Assistant
General information
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant can be adjusted.
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
145
Light and view
CONTROLS
▷
▷
In very unfavorable weather conditions
such as fog or heavy precipitation.
Safety information
When detecting poorly-lit road users such
as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders
and wagons; when driving close to train or
ship traffic; or at animal crossings.
Warning
If adjustments have been made or the sen-
sitivity has been modified, oncoming traffic
may be momentarily blinded. There is a risk
of accident. If adjustments have been made
and the sensitivity has been modified, make
sure that oncoming traffic is not momentarily
blinded. Switch off the high beams manually
if required.
▷
In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in crossing traffic or half-obscured oncom-
ing traffic on highways.
▷
▷
In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs.
When the windshield in front of the interior
mirror is fogged up, dirty or covered with
stickers, etc.
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Setting at standstill only.
Drive-ready state is switched on.
Light is turned off.
Exterior lighting
Overview
Increasing sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front for ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Buttons in the vehicle
A Check Control message is displayed. The
system responds more sensitively.
Resetting the sensitivity
Push the turn signal lever to the front again
for approx. 10 seconds or switch off the drive-
ready state.
The sensitivity of the Automatic High Beam
Assistant is reset to the factory settings.
Icon
Function
System limits
Exterior lighting off.
The Automatic High Beam Assistant cannot
replace the driver's personal judgment of when
to use the high beams. When appropriate, dim
the high beams manually.
Daytime driving lights.
Parking lights.
The system may not be fully operational in
the following situations, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
Automatic headlight control.
Adaptive lighting functions.
Low beams.
146
Light and view
CONTROLS
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster is illuminated when the low
beams are switched on.
Icon
Function
Instrument lighting.
System limits
The automatic headlight control cannot re-
place your personal judgment of lighting condi-
tions.
Right roadside parking light.
Left roadside parking light.
For example, the sensors are unable to detect
fog or hazy weather. In these situations, turn
the lights on manually.
Buttons on the vehicle key
Icon
Function
Parking lights, low-beams
and roadside parking lights
Interior lighting.
Parts of the exterior lighting.
General information
Pathway lighting.
If the driver's door is opened when the drive-
ready state is switched off, the exterior lighting
is automatically switched off after a period of
time.
Automatic headlight control
Parking lights
Principle
General information
The parking lights can only be switched on in
the low speed range.
The low beams are switched on and off au-
tomatically depending on the ambient bright-
ness, for example in tunnels, in twilight or if
there is precipitation.
Turning on parking lights
General information
Press the button on the light switch.
A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon can
cause the lights to be turned on.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
If the low beams are switched on manually, the
automatic headlight control is deactivated.
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Activate automatic headlight control
Do not use the parking lights for extended pe-
riods; otherwise, they might drain the vehicle
battery and it would then be impossible to
switch on drive-ready state.
Press the button on the light switch.
The LED in the button illuminates.
147
Light and view
CONTROLS
Switching off the roadside parking light:
Turning off parking lights
The following options are available to turn off
the parking lights:
Press the button on the light switch or
turn on drive-ready state.
▷
▷
Press the button on the light switch.
Turn on drive-ready state.
Welcome lights
After the drive-ready state is switched on,
the automatic headlight control will be acti-
vated.
Principle
The welcome light turns on automatically for
a limited period of time when approaching or
unlocking the vehicle.
Low beams
Turning on low beams
General information
Depending on the equipment, the exterior
lighting of the vehicle can be set individually.
Press the button on the light switch.
The low beams illuminate when drive-ready
state is switched on.
Activating/deactivating welcome
light
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster illuminates.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
Press the button again to switch on the low
beams when the standby state is switched on.
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
Turning off low beams
Depending on the national-market version, the
low beams can be turned off in the low speed
range:
▷
"Welcome and goodbye"
When unlocking the vehicle, individual
lighting functions are turned on.
▷
Press the button on the light switch.
Turning on the welcome light
▷
Automatically on approach.
Roadside parking lights
When the vehicle is parked, a one-sided road-
side parking light can be switched on.
▷
During unlocking.
▷
Press the button on the vehicle key
with the vehicle locked.
Button Function
Right roadside parking light on.
Depending on the settings, the interior
lighting and parts of the exterior lighting will
be turned on.
Left roadside parking light off.
The function is not available for the first
10 seconds after locking.
148
Light and view
CONTROLS
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
Pathway lighting
5. Depending on vehicle equipment or na-
tional-market version:
Principle
▷
▷
"Daytime driving lights"
For the pathway lighting, the exterior lighting
turns on for a certain period of time after leav-
ing the vehicle in order to illuminate the area
surrounding the vehicle.
"Rear daytime driving lights"
Adaptive lighting functions
Switching pathway lighting on
Principle
▷
After switching off the drive-ready state,
briefly push the turn signal lever forward.
Adaptive lighting functions enable dynamic il-
lumination of the road.
▷
Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
General information
The adaptive lighting functions may consist of
one system or multiple systems, depending on
the equipment version:
Setting the duration
1.
Apps menu
▷
▷
Adaptive Light Control.
Cornering light.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Additional settings"
5. "Pathway lighting"
Activating the adaptive lighting
functions
6. Select the desired setting.
Press the button on the light switch.
Daytime driving lights
The LED in the button illuminates.
The adaptive lighting functions are active
when the drive-ready state is switched on.
General information
The daytime driving lights illuminate when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Adaptive Light Control
Activating/deactivating daytime
driving lights
In some countries, daytime driving lights are
mandatory, so it may not be possible to deacti-
vate the daytime driving lights in front.
General information
Depending on the steering-wheel angle and
other parameters, the light from the headlight
follows the course of the road.
To avoid blinding oncoming traffic, the Adap-
tive Light Control does not swivel to the oppo-
site lane when the vehicle is at a standstill.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Exterior lighting"
149
Light and view
CONTROLS
Cornering light
Interior lighting
Principle
General information
In tight curves, for instance on mountainous
roads or when turning, an additional cornering
light is switched on that illuminates the inside
of the curve when the vehicle is moving below
a certain speed.
Depending on the equipment version, interior
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, ambient
lighting, and speaker lighting are automatically
controlled.
Overview
General information
The cornering light is automatically switched
on depending on the steering-wheel angle or,
where applicable, the use of turn signals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering lights
may be automatically switched on regardless
of the steering-wheel angle.
Adaptive headlight range
control
Reading lights
Interior lights
The adaptive headlight range control feature
balances out acceleration and braking proc-
esses as well as the vehicle load conditions in
order to avoid blinding oncoming traffic.
Turning interior lights on/off
Press the button.
Instrument lighting
To switch off permanently: press the button
and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Functional requirement
The brightness can only be adjusted when the
parking lights or low beams are turned on.
The interior lights in the rear of the vehicle
can be switched on and off independently. The
button is located in the rear headliner.
Setting the brightness
Adjust the brightness with the
thumbwheel.
Turning reading lights on/off
Press the button.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the read-
ing lights are located next to the interior lights
in the front and rear.
150
Light and view
CONTROLS
Dynamic light
Ambient light
Individual actions, for example incoming calls
or opened doors, are indicated by light effects.
If the ambient light is disabled, the light effects
are still displayed.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, lighting
can be adjusted for some lights in the car's
interior.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Activating/deactivating ambient
light
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Dynamic light"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
6. Select the desired setting.
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Reduced for night drive
Some lights of the interior lighting are reduced
when the vehicle is driven in the dark.
Turning ambient light on/off
1.
Apps menu
The ambient light is switched on when the ve-
hicle is unlocked, and switched off when the
vehicle is locked.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Reduced for night driving"
If the ambient light was deactivated via iDrive,
it will not be turned on when the vehicle is
unlocked.
Window wiper system
Safety information
Warning
Selecting the color
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Color"
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
6. Select the desired setting.
Setting the brightness
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Interior lighting"
4. If necessary, "Ambience"
5. "Brightness"
6. Select the desired setting.
151
Light and view
CONTROLS
NOTICE
Turning off the window wiper
system and flick wipe
The wiper blades can wear out or become
damaged prematurely when wiping on a dry
window for a longer period of time. The wiper
motor can overheat. There is a risk of dam-
age to property. Do not use the wipers when
the window is dry.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Press the lever down.
▷
Turning off: press the lever down until it
reaches the 0 position.
▷
Flick wipe: press the lever down from the 0
position.
The lever automatically returns to its 0 po-
sition when released.
Turning on window wiper system
Rain sensor
Principle
The rain sensor automatically controls the
wiper operation depending on the intensity of
the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror.
Press the lever up until the desired position is
reached.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Resting position of the wipers, position 0.
Rain sensor, position 1.
Safety information
Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Fast wiper speed, position 3.
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in car washes.
There is a risk of damage to property. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor in car washes.
When the journey is interrupted with the win-
dow wiper system turned on: when the journey
continues, the wipers resume at their previous
speed.
152
Light and view
CONTROLS
Activating rain sensor
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the window
at low temperatures and obstruct the view.
There is a risk of accident. Only use the
washer systems if the washer fluid cannot
freeze. Use washer fluid with antifreeze, if
needed.
Press lever up once from the 0 position, ar-
row 1.
Wiping operation is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
NOTICE
In frosty conditions, wiping operation may not
start.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the washer pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property. Do
not use the washer system when the washer
fluid reservoir is empty.
Deactivating rain sensor
Press lever back into the 0 position.
Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
Cleaning the windshield
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the sensitivity
of the rain sensor.
Pull the lever.
The washer fluid is sprayed onto the wind-
shield directly in front of the wiper blade when
the wiper moves upward.
▷
▷
Upward: high rain sensor sensitivity.
Downward: low rain sensor sensitivity.
Fold-out position of the wipers
Principle
In the fold-out position, the wipers can be
folded out from the windshield, which is impor-
tant, for instance, when changing the wiper
153
Light and view
CONTROLS
blades or for folding away under frosty condi-
tions.
Folding out the wipers
1. Turn on standby state.
2. Press and hold the wiper lever down until
the wipers stop in a nearly vertical position.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded away
state, body parts can be jammed or damage
may occur to parts of the vehicle. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Make sure that the vehicle is switched off
when the wipers are in the folded-away state
and the wipers are folded in when switching
on.
3. Fold the wipers all the way out from the
windshield.
NOTICE
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching on.
There is a risk of damage to property. Defrost
the windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Folding in the wipers
1. Fold the wipers back in onto the windshield.
2. Switch on standby state and press and
hold the wiper lever down again.
Wipers return to their resting position and
are ready again for operation.
154
Safety
CONTROLS
Safety
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Vehicle features and options
Additional information:
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Airbags
1
Front airbag, driver
Front airbag, front passenger
Head airbag
4
5
Side airbag
Knee airbag
2
3
Front airbags
Side airbag
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
protects the side of the body in the chest and
lap area.
The front airbag helps protect the driver and
front passenger in the event of a frontal impact
in which the seat belts alone would not provide
adequate protection.
Depending on the national-market version:
In the event of a side collision, the side airbag
in the rear protects the chest and lap area on
155
Safety
CONTROLS
the side of the bodies of the occupants in the
outer rear seats.
3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions to keep the
risk of injury to your hands or arms as low
as possible when the airbag is deployed.
Head airbag
In the event of a side collision, the head airbag
protects the head.
▷
▷
Adjust seat and steering wheel so that
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
shoulder rests against the backrest when
crossing the hands and the upper body
is as far back as possible while still main-
taining a comfortable grip on the steering
wheel.
Ejection Mitigation
The head airbag system is designed as an
ejection mitigation countermeasure to reduce
the likelihood of ejections of vehicle occupants
through side windows during rollovers or side
collision events.
Make sure that the front passenger is sit-
ting correctly, i.e., with their feet and legs in
the footwell, not resting on the dashboard.
▷
▷
Make sure that occupants keep their heads
away from the side airbag.
Knee airbag
Depending on the national-market version:
There should be no additional persons, an-
imals or objects between an airbag and a
person.
The knee airbag protects the legs in the event
of a frontal impact.
▷
▷
Dashboard and windshield on the pas-
senger's side must stay clear - do not at-
tach adhesive film or coverings and do not
attach brackets or cables, for instance for
navigation devices or mobile phones.
Protective effect
General information
Airbags are not deployed in every impact sit-
uation, e.g., in less severe accidents.
Do not bond the airbag cover panels with
adhesive, do not cover them or modify
them in any way.
Information on optimum protective
effect of the airbags
▷
▷
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on
the passenger's side as a storage area.
Warning
Keep storage compartments near the air-
bags closed, e.g., glove compartment or
center armrest.
If the seat position is incorrect, the seat
belts are fastened incorrectly or the deploy-
ment area of the airbags is impaired, the
airbag system cannot provide protection as
intended and may cause additional injuries
due to deployment. There is a risk of injury
or danger to life. Follow the information on
achieving the optimum protective effect of the
airbag system.
▷
Do not place slip covers, seat cushions,
or other objects on the front seats unless
they are specifically designed for seats with
integrated airbags.
▷
▷
Do not hang pieces of clothing such as
jackets over the backrests.
Do not modify individual components or
wiring. This also applies to steering wheel
covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
▷
▷
▷
Keep a distance from the airbags.
Fasten the seat belts correctly.
▷
Do not disassemble the airbag system.
Always grasp the steering wheel on the
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at the
156
Safety
CONTROLS
Even when you follow all instructions very
closely, injury from contact with the airbags
cannot be fully ruled out in certain situations.
Malfunction
▷
Warning light does not illuminate
when drive-ready state is turned on.
The ignition and inflation noise may lead
to short-term and, in most cases, temporary
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants.
▷
The warning light illuminates con-
tinuously.
The airbag system or the seat belt tension-
ers may be not operational. Have the vehicle
checked immediately by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Vehicle modifications for a person with disabil-
ities may affect the air bag system; contact
BMW Customer Relations for further informa-
tion.
Warnings and information on the airbags are
also found on the sun visors.
Setting the front seat positions
Operational readiness of the airbag
system
The power that deploys the driver's/front pas-
senger airbags depends on the position of the
driver's/front passenger seat.
Safety information
To maintain the accuracy of this function, cali-
brate the electrical front seats as soon as a re-
spective message appears on the control dis-
play.
Warning
Individual components can be hot after de-
ployment of the airbag system. There is a risk
of injury. Do not touch individual components.
Additional information:
Seats, refer to page 92.
Automatic deactivation of
the front passenger airbags
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to failure,
malfunction or unintentional deployment of
the airbag system. In the case of a malfunc-
tion, the airbag system might not deploy as
intended despite the accident severity. There
is a risk of injury or danger to life. Have the
airbag system checked, repaired, disassem-
bled, and scrapped by an authorized service
center or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Principle
The system reads if the front passenger seat
is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
The front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
General information
Before transporting a child on the front pas-
senger seat, refer to the safety information and
instructions for children on the front passenger
seat, see Children.
Display in the instrument cluster
When drive-ready state is turned on,
the warning light in the instrument
cluster illuminates briefly, thereby indi-
cating the operational readiness of the entire
airbag system and the seat belt tensioners.
157
Safety
CONTROLS
passenger's side are not ac-
tivated.
Safety information
▷
The indicator light does not illuminate
when, for instance, a correctly seated per-
son of sufficient size is detected on the
seat. The airbags on the passenger's side
are activated.
Warning
To ensure the front passenger airbag func-
tion, the system must be able to detect
whether a person is sitting in the front pas-
senger seat. The entire seat surface must
be used for this purpose. There is a risk of
injury or danger to life. Make sure that the
front passenger keeps his or her feet in the
footwell.
Fault of the automatic deactivation
system
When transporting older children and adults,
the front passenger airbags may be deacti-
vated in certain seat positions. In this case, the
indicator light for the front passenger airbags
illuminates.
Functional requirements
To enable accurate recognition of the occupied
seat surface:
In this case, change the seat position so that
the front passenger airbags are activated and
the indicator light goes out.
▷
Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
or other items to the front passenger seat
unless they are specifically determined to
be safe for use on the front passenger seat.
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, have
the person sit in the rear seat.
▷
▷
Do not place objects under the seat that
can press against the seat from below.
Detected child restraint systems
Do not place any electronic devices on the
front passenger seat if a child restraint sys-
tem is to be installed on it.
The system generally detects children seated
in a child restraint system, particularly in child
restraint systems required by NHTSA at the
point in time when the vehicle was manufac-
tured. After installing a child restraint system,
make sure that the indicator light for the front
passenger airbags illuminates. This indicates
that the child restraint system has been de-
tected and the front passenger airbags are not
activated.
▷
No moisture in or on the seat.
Indicator light for the front
passenger airbags
The indicator light for the front-seat passenger
airbag in the headliner indicates the operating
state of the front-seat passenger airbag.
The light indicates whether the airbags are ei-
ther activated or deactivated.
Collision warning systems
After drive-ready state is switched on, the light
shortly illuminates and then indicates whether
the airbags are either activated or deactivated.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the vehicle has
different systems that can help prevent the risk
of imminent collision.
▷
The indicator light illuminates
when a child is properly
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is
empty. The airbags on the
▷
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake in-
tervention, refer to page 160.
▷
Lane departure warning, refer to page 165.
158
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Active Blind Spot Detection, refer to
page 168.
Turning on/turning off collision
warning systems
Depending on national-market version, some
of the systems are automatically activated
whenever you start driving.
Rear-end collision preparation, refer to
page 170.
Safety information
The following functions are adjustable.
1.
Apps menu
Warning
2. "Vehicle"
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. Select the desired settings.
Resetting the settings
The settings of the collision warning systems
can be reset to the default settings at vehicle
delivery.
1.
Apps menu
Warning
2. "Vehicle"
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Reset to recommended settings"
System limits
Safety information
Sensors
Warning
Depending on vehicle equipment, the Intelli-
gent Safety systems are controlled by the fol-
lowing sensors:
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Radar sensors, side, front.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
159
Safety
CONTROLS
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
Safety information
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Warning
Forward Collision Mitigation
with brake intervention
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Principle
The Forward Collision Mitigation can help
prevent accidents. If an accident cannot be
avoided, the system can help reduce the se-
verity of the accident.
The system can issue a warning of a possible
risk of collision and activate the brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion enabled or Cruise Control switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch off Forward
Collision Mitigation and Cruise Control before
towing.
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the For-
ward Collision Mitigation system includes the
following functions:
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function, refer to page 163.
▷
Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation, re-
fer to page 163.
Sensors
Depending on the equipment, the system is
controlled by the following sensors:
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
160
Safety
CONTROLS
Speed range
The system issues a warning of a possi-
ble risk of collision at speeds above approx.
3 mph/5 km/h.
Setting the warning time
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. Select the desired setting.
Some functions are deactivated earlier.
The system is enabled as soon as the speed
drops below these values again.
The more sensitive the warning time is set to
be, the more warnings will be displayed. The
system can therefore also issue more early or
unfounded warnings and reactions.
Turning the Forward Collision
Mitigation on/off
Display in the instrument cluster
Turning on the system automatically
The following indicator/warning lights are
shown on the instrument cluster and, depend-
ing on vehicle equipment, on the Head-up dis-
play:
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Turning on system manually
Icon
Meaning
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 161.
Risk of collision, for instance with a
preceding vehicle.
Turning system off manually
Depending on national-market version, the ad-
justment can only be made when the vehicle is
at a standstill or in a very low speed range.
The corresponding indicator lights and warn-
ing lights may display differently if the system
detects multiple objects.
If necessary, the switch-off must be confirmed
successively on the control display.
Warning function
The Forward Collision Mitigation warns on dif-
ferent warning levels, depending on the re-
spective hazardous situation.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Forward Collision Mitigation"
7. "Off"
In the event of a prewarning, a warning light
illuminates red. In the event of an acute warn-
ing, a warning light flashes red and a warning
tone sounds.
In the event of a system warning, the driver
must intervene immediately and in accordance
with the situation.
161
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Red warning light illuminates:
System limits
A hazardous situation has been detected.
Increased awareness is required.
Safety information
Red warning light flashes:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
A warning signal sounds:
There is a risk of collision. Intervene imme-
diately.
Automatic brake intervention:
Depending on the equipment and situation
in case of risk of imminent collision, the
system can also intervene with an auto-
matic brake intervention and automatically
decelerate the vehicle, if necessary, to a
complete stop.
Detection capability
The system's detection capability is limited.
When the brake pedal is depressed quickly and
hard, the maximum brake power of the vehicle
is used.
The system only takes into account objects
that are located in the detection range of the
installed sensors and are detected by the sys-
tem.
Automatic brake intervention
In case of a risk of collision, the system can
assist with an automatic brake intervention, if
necessary.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the area
is monitored by cameras or radar sensors.
Thus, a system response might not come or
might come late.
When the vehicle is traveling at a low speed,
the vehicle may come to a complete stop.
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
During automatic brake intervention, Dynamic
Stability Control activates automatically.
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
A brake intervention can be canceled by de-
pressing the accelerator pedal with sufficient
force, releasing the brake pedal, or by actively
steering.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
City brake function: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 50 mph/80 km/h.
▷
▷
In tight curves.
With limitation of the driving stability control
systems.
With radar sensor: the brake intervention oc-
curs to up to approx. 155 mph/250 km/h.
▷
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
At speeds above approx. 130 mph/210 km/h,
only a brief brake intervention will occur.
162
Safety
CONTROLS
Icon
Meaning
Forward Collision Warning
with braking function
Forward Collision Warning with a de-
tected vehicle.
Principle
The Forward Collision Warning with braking
function warns of a possible risk of collision
and may brake independently.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Additional information:
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 160.
System limits
General information
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
Detection range
The following situations may not be detected,
or only detected with a delay, for instance:
▷
Vehicle driving slowly in front and being ap-
proached at high speed.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
▷
Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front of
you, or strongly decelerating vehicles.
The system issues a warning of a possible risk
of collision with vehicles at speeds above ap-
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warnings
may vary with the current driving situation.
▷
▷
Vehicles with unusual rear designs.
Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily. As soon as the speed drops below
this value again, the system is reactivated.
The system considers the driver’s vehicle han-
dling when responding. If an active driving
style is detected, warnings and brake interven-
tions occur less frequently.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
Daytime Pedestrian
Collision Mitigation
Display in the instrument cluster
Principle
If there is a risk of collision with a detected
vehicle, a warning light is displayed.
At speeds that are common in towns and cit-
ies, the Daytime Pedestrian Collision Mitigation
function warns the driver of a possible risk
163
Safety
CONTROLS
of collision with pedestrians and cyclists. The
system may brake automatically.
System limits
In the event of an accident, the system helps
by reducing impact speed.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Forward Colli-
sion Mitigation" chapter.
General information
Detection range
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
The detection range in front of the vehicle is
divided into two areas:
The system issues a warning of a possible
risk of collision with pedestrians or cyclists at
speeds above approx. 3 mph/5 km/h.
▷
Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of the
vehicle.
▷
Extended area, arrows 2, to the right and
left of the central area.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in Chapter “For-
ward Collision Mitigation”.
There is a risk of collision if persons, e.g.,
pedestrians or cyclists, are located within the
central area. A warning is issued about pedes-
trians who are located within the extended
area only if they are moving in the direction of
the central area.
Display in the instrument cluster
If there is a risk of collision with a detected pe-
destrian or cyclist, a warning light is displayed.
The following situations may not be detected,
for instance:
Icon
Meaning
Risk of collision with a person, e.g., a
pedestrian.
▷
▷
Partially covered pedestrians or bikes.
Pedestrians that are not detected as such
because of their contour or posture.
▷
Pedestrians with insufficient height.
Warning function
The warning prompts the driver to intervene.
Upper speed limit
Additional information:
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
system responds to pedestrians and cyclists
when your vehicle speed is less than approx.
50 mph/80 km/h.
Forward Collision Mitigation, refer to page 160.
164
Safety
CONTROLS
Lane Departure Warning
Warning
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judgment.
Due to its limits, the system may not issue
warnings or responses, or these may be is-
sued late or in a manner that is not consis-
tent with their normal use. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
Principle
The lane departure warning alerts when the
vehicle is about to run off the road or exit the
lane.
General information
Functional requirement
The camera must detect the lane boundaries
for the lane departure warning to be active.
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
Sensors detect the traffic situation in their de-
tection range.
Sensors
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
The system issues a warning starting at a min-
imum speed. The minimum speed is country-
specific and displayed on the control display.
Turning the Lane Departure
Warning on/off
Warnings are displayed in the instrument clus-
ter. In addition, the steering wheel vibrates.
The system does not provide a warning if the
turn signal is set in the respective direction be-
fore exiting the lane.
Turning on the system automatically
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active after every de-
parture.
Safety information
Turning on system manually
The system is activated by setting the warning
time.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in assess-
ing road and traffic situations. There is a
risk of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate. Do
not jerk the steering wheel in response to a
warning.
Additional information:
Setting the warning time, refer to page 166.
165
Safety
CONTROLS
6. "Vibration intensity"
Turning system off manually
7. Select the desired setting.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, you must successively confirm
the switch-off on the control display.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
1.
Apps menu
Depending on the national-market
version: turning steering intervention
on/off
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Off"
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. "Steering intervention"
Setting Lane Departure Warning
Setting the warning time
Depending on the national-market version, the
steering intervention is automatically active af-
ter every driving off.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Lane Departure Warning"
7. Select the desired setting.
Display in the instrument cluster
Different system statuses are displayed on
the instrument cluster, depending on vehicle
equipment and national-market version.
▷
▷
▷
"Early"
Icon
Meaning
"Medium"
"Reduced"
Indicator light illuminates green: Sys-
tem is switched on. At least one lane
boundary has been detected on one
side of the vehicle. The system is
ready to intervene and issue warn-
ings. The system can perform steer-
ing interventions.
Some warnings are suppressed de-
pending on the situation, for instance
when purposely driving over lane mark-
ings in curves or with dynamic passing
without a turn signal.
Indicator light flashes green: System
is performing a steering intervention.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
1.
Apps menu
Warning function
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
If you leave the lane
If you leave the lane and if a lane boundary
has been detected, the steering wheel vibrates
166
Safety
CONTROLS
in accordance with the steering wheel vibration
setting.
In addition, a Check Control message is dis-
played.
When the turn signal is switched on in the cor-
responding direction before changing the lane,
a warning is not issued.
The warning signal and Check Control mes-
sage advise to pay closer attention to the lane.
End of warning
For instance, the warning or an active steering
intervention will be canceled in the following
situations:
Steering intervention
Depending on the equipment and the national-
market version: if a lane marking is crossed in
the speed range up to 130 mph/210 km/h, the
system intervenes with a brief active steering
intervention in addition to vibrating. The sys-
tem supports the driver in keeping the vehicle
within the lane. The steering intervention can
be noticed on the steering wheel and can be
manually overridden at any time.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Automatically after a few seconds.
When returning to your own lane.
With hard accelerating or braking.
With hazard warning system switched on.
When flashing.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
When steering intervention is active,
the indicator light flashes green.
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
For instance, the steering intervention will be
suppressed in the following situations:
▷
▷
With manual steering intervention.
▷
▷
▷
▷
With hard accelerating or braking.
When flashing.
When another driver assistance system is
activated, if applicable.
With hazard warning system switched on.
▷
▷
No lane boundaries detected.
In driving situation with high driving dynam-
ics.
When the system limits are reached.
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
System limits
Immediately following a steering interven-
tion by the vehicle systems.
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
When actively merging back to your own
lane after passing.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Warning signal
Depending on the national-market version: in
the event of multiple active steering interven-
tions by the system within 3 minutes with-
out the driver's intervention at the steering
wheel during the steering intervention itself, an
acoustic warning will sound. A short warning
signal will sound at the second steering inter-
vention. Beginning with the third steering inter-
vention, a continuous warning will sound.
▷
In the event of missing, worn, poorly visible,
merging, diverging, or multiple lane boun-
daries such as in construction areas.
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
167
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
With lane boundaries that are covered by
objects.
Before you change lanes after setting the turn
signal, the system issues a warning in the
situations described above. The warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes and the steering
wheel vibrates.
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
Up to 10 seconds after drive-ready state is
switched on via the Start/Stop button.
When turning at a speed of up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, the steering wheel will not
vibrate.
While Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
Active Blind Spot Detection
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Principle
Active Blind Spot Detection detects vehicles
in the blind spot or vehicles approaching from
behind in the adjacent lane.
▷
▷
Camera behind the windshield.
Radar sensors, side, rear.
The warning light in the exterior mirror gives
warnings at different levels.
Functional requirement
The areas of the sensors must be clean and
clear.
General information
Turning Active Blind Spot Detection
on/off
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind and
next to the vehicle when traveling faster than a
minimum speed.
Adjusting the Active Blind Spot
Detection
The minimum speed is country-specific and
displayed in the Active Blind Spot Detection
menu.
Setting the warning time
The system indicates whether there are vehi-
cles in your blind spot, arrow 1, or approaching
from behind in an adjacent lane, arrow 2. The
warning light in the exterior mirror illuminates
dimly.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
168
Safety
CONTROLS
4. "Driver Assistance"
An acute warning is issued if the following con-
ditions are met:
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Active Blind Spot Detection"
7. Select the desired setting.
▷
▷
▷
Another vehicle is located in the critical
area.
Your own vehicle is approaching the other
lane.
Setting the intensity of the steering
wheel vibration
Depending on the system setting when the
turn signal is turned on.
1.
Apps menu
The warning stops when the other vehicle has
left the critical area or the turn signal has been
turned off.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Feedback via steering wheel"
6. "Vibration intensity"
7. Select the desired setting.
Warning light flashing
When the vehicle is unlocked, the warning light
in the exterior mirror flashes for self-testing
purposes.
The setting is applied to all collision warning
systems.
System limits
Warning function
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Warning light in exterior mirror
Upper speed limit
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is deactivated
temporarily.
If the vehicle speed falls below approx.
155 mph/250 km/h, the system is reactivated.
Displaying warnings
The warning light in the exterior mirror warns
of a possible collision with a detected vehicle.
Depending on the selected warning settings,
e.g., warning time, more or fewer warnings can
be displayed. However, there may also be an
excess of unwarranted warnings of critical sit-
uations.
Prewarning
The dimmed warning light in the exterior mirror
indicates when vehicles are in your blind spot
or approaching from the rear.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
Acute warning
When an acute warning occurs, the steering
wheel vibrates briefly. The warning light in the
exterior mirror flashes brightly.
169
Safety
CONTROLS
▷
When a vehicle is approaching at a speed
much faster than your own.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the radar sensors
on the sides and rear.
▷
▷
In tight corners or on narrow roads.
The bumper is dirty, iced up or covered,
for instance by stickers.
Turning rear-end collision
preparation on/off
The system is automatically active when the
vehicle is turned on.
A Check Control message may be displayed
when the system is limited. A yellow warning
light also illuminates, depending on national-
market version.
The system is deactivated when reversing.
System limits
Rear-end collision
preparation
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Collision warn-
ing systems" chapter.
Principle
Depending on the equipment and national-
market version, the rear-end collision prepara-
tion can react to vehicles approaching from be-
hind.
Functional limitations
This function may be restricted if the speed
of the approaching vehicle is much higher or
similar to your own speed.
General information
Cross traffic warning
Principle
At blind driveway exits or when driving out of
perpendicular parking spaces, road users ap-
proaching from the side are detected sooner
by the cross traffic warning than is possible
from the driver's seat.
Radar sensors monitor the area behind the ve-
hicle.
When a vehicle approaches from the rear at a
certain speed, the system can react as follows:
▷
Where applicable, the hazard warning
flashers will be switched on.
▷
Where applicable, the PreCrash functions
are triggered.
Safety information
Follow the safety information in the "Forward
Collision Mitigation" chapter.
170
Safety
CONTROLS
General information
Activating/deactivating Cross Traffic
Warning
The system must be activated on the control
display for the Cross Traffic Warning to switch
on automatically.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
The area behind the vehicle is monitored by
sensors.
6. Depending on the equipment, select the
following setting:
The system indicates approaching road users.
▷
▷
"Rear warning"
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
"Front and rear warning"
Safety information
Turning on the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system must be activated on the control
display. The system turns on automatically as
soon as Park Distance Control or a camera
view activates and you engage a gear position.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
If reverse gear is engaged, the rear system is
switched on.
Depending on the national-market version, the
system is automatically active when the vehi-
cle is started.
Turning off the cross traffic warning
automatically
The system is automatically turned off in the
following situations:
Sensors
The system is controlled by the radar sensors
on the sides at the rear.
▷
▷
When the speed exceeds walking speed.
When a certain distance covered is ex-
ceeded.
Warning function
General information
The control display shows the corresponding
view, an acoustic signal may sound as neces-
171
Safety
CONTROLS
sary, and the warning light in the exterior mir-
ror flashes.
Depending on vehicle equipment: display in
camera image
In case of a brake intervention, a message is
displayed on the control display and close after
a brief period of time.
Visual warning
Warning light in exterior mirror
The respective boundary area, arrow 1, in the
camera image flashes red if vehicles are de-
tected by the sensors.
Yellow lines, arrow 2, mark the bumper of your
own vehicle.
Acoustic warning
In addition to the visual warning, a signal tone
sounds if your own vehicle moves into the re-
spective direction.
The warning light in the exterior mirror flashes
if the rear sensors detect other vehicles when
the vehicle is reversing.
Depending on the national-market version, the
signal tone will already sound when the gear
position is engaged.
Display in the Park Distance Control view
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Functional limitations
The function can be limited, for instance in the
following situations:
In the Park Distance Control view, the respec-
tive boundary area flashes red if vehicles are
detected by the sensors.
▷
▷
In tight curves.
Crossing objects are moving at a very slow
or a very fast speed.
▷
Other objects that hide cross traffic are in
the capture range of the sensors.
172
Safety
CONTROLS
Other drivers of the vehicle must be informed
about the system. In addition, information
about the system is required when handing off
the vehicle.
BMW Drive Recorder
Principle
The BMW Drive Recorder stores brief video
recordings of the vehicle surroundings, e.g., to
document surrounding traffic.
Functional requirements
▷
Standby state or drive-ready state is
switched on.
General information
Video recordings can be saved in different
ways:
▷
▷
▷
▷
BMW Drive Recorder is activated.
Privacy Policy was accepted.
Recording type was selected.
Recording time was selected.
▷
Automatic storage of the recording.
The function makes it possible to document
the accident with the correspondingly set
recording type.
Activating/deactivating the BMW
Drive Recorder
The BMW Drive Recorder must be activated
before the first use of the recording function.
▷
Manual storage of the recording.
This function is used to document traffic sit-
uations with the configured recording type.
1.
Apps menu
The assistance systems' cameras are used to
record, e.g., Panorama View.
2. "All apps"
Additionally, the following parameters are
stored for the trip:
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. Accept Privacy Policy.
5. "Settings"
▷
▷
▷
▷
Date.
Time.
6. "Allow recording"
7. Select the desired setting.
Vehicle speed.
Global Positioning System coordinates.
Recording functions
Data protection
Automatic recording
Recordings are saved automatically when the
vehicle sensors detect an accident.
The permissibility of recording and using video
recordings is contingent upon the statutory
regulations of the country in which the system
is to be used. The user is responsible for the
use of the system and compliance with respec-
tive applicable regulations.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
If the vehicle accelerates rapidly, an automatic
recording may be taken.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
confirming there are no statutory or regulatory
constraints on use of the system in your state
or country prior to the initial use. In addition,
the laws with respect to use of the system
should be verified in regular intervals, espe-
cially when borders are frequently crossed.
173
Safety
CONTROLS
4. "Recordings"
Manual recording
5. Select desired recording.
Using the button
If a camera change occurred during the record-
ing, different segments of the video can be se-
lected.
Settings
Recording type
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
Press and hold this button.
5. Select the desired setting.
Via iDrive
Recording time
Start the recording:
1.
Apps menu
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Recording"
5. Select the desired setting.
5. "Start recording"
Cameras
Different cameras can be selected.
Recording can also be started by selecting the
widget on the control display.
The system saves recordings up to 20 sec-
onds before and after storage is triggered.
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
4. "Settings"
Recording playback and
administration
5. "Cam. selection"
6. Select desired camera.
Stored video recordings can be played back,
exported and deleted.
For your own safety, the video recording is
only displayed on the control display up to ap-
prox. 2 mph/3 km/h. In some national-market
versions, the video recording is only displayed
if the parking brake is engaged or if the selec-
tor lever is in the P position.
"All": In the event of an accident, the system
switches automatically.
If driver assistance systems are enabled, their
camera views are automatically selected.
System limits
In the event of serious accidents, it may not
be possible to store recordings if the damage
1.
Apps menu
2. "All apps"
3. "Drive Recorder"
174
Safety
CONTROLS
on the vehicle is too great or the power supply
was interrupted.
Safety information
If you overwrite a USB drive multiple times, it
may not be possible to export recordings cor-
rectly.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, critical situations might not be
detected reliably or in time. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic con-
ditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely and
actively intervene where appropriate.
The preferred file system for USB storage is
NTFS. Other file systems may have limitations.
Active Protection
Principle
Function
Depending on the equipment and require-
ments, the following individual functions are
active in accident-critical driving situations:
Active Protection prepares occupants and the
vehicle for a possible accident in critical driving
or collision situations.
General information
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, Active Protection consists of
various PreCrash functions.
▷
▷
▷
Automatic closing of the windows.
The windows remain open with a small
gap.
The glass sunroof/panoramic glass sunroof
closes automatically.
The system is used to detect certain critical
driving situations that might lead to an acci-
dent. This includes the following critical driving
situations:
The sun protection is also closed.
Automatic positioning of the backrest for
the front passenger seat.
▷
▷
▷
Emergency braking.
Severe understeering.
Severe oversteering.
Systems can be returned to the desired set-
tings following a critical driving situation with-
out accident.
Certain functions of several systems can,
within the system limits, lead to Active Protec-
tion triggering:
PostCrash – iBrake
▷
▷
▷
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function: automatic brake intervention.
Principle
Forward Collision Warning with braking
function: brake booster.
In certain accident situations, the PostCrash –
iBrake can automatically bring the vehicle to a
standstill without intervention by the driver.
Rear-end collision preparation: detection of
impending rear-end collisions.
General information
The PostCrash – iBrake can reduce the risk of
a further collision and its consequences.
175
Safety
CONTROLS
and alert. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions.
At standstill
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
automatically.
Break recommendation
Harder vehicle deceleration
In certain situations, it may be necessary to
bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
automatic braking with PostCrash iBrake al-
lows.
Function
After starting the trip, the system is trained to
the driver, so that decreasing alertness or fati-
gue can be detected.
To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
brake. For a brief period, the brake pressure
will be higher than the brake pressure that is
achieved by the automatic brake function. Au-
tomatic braking is interrupted.
This procedure takes, for example, the follow-
ing criteria into account:
▷
Personal driving style, for instance steering
behavior.
▷
Driving conditions, for instance time, length
of trip.
Abort automatic braking
It may be necessary to interrupt automatic
braking in certain situations, for instance when
making an evasive maneuver.
The system is active starting at ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h and can also display a
break recommendation.
Abort automatic braking:
Setting break recommendation
The break recommendation can be switched
on, off and adjusted via iDrive.
▷
▷
By depressing the brake pedal.
By pressing the accelerator pedal.
1.
Apps menu
Fatigue alert
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Fatigue Alert"
Principle
The Fatigue Alert break recommendation fea-
ture can detect when the driver is fatigued or
less alert during long, monotonous trips, for in-
stance on highways. The system recommends
a break.
7. Select the desired setting.
Display
Safety information
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the control display
with the recommendation to take a break.
Warning
During the display, various settings can be se-
lected.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
one's physical state. An increasing lack of
alertness or fatigue may not be detected or
not be detected in time. There is a risk of
accident. Make sure that the driver is rested
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes after
parking the vehicle. A break recommendation
can only be displayed again after this time has
elapsed.
176
Safety
CONTROLS
System limits
The Fatigue Alert system may be limited. If
the system is limited, either no warning may
be issued or an unwarranted warning may be
issued.
The break recommendation function may be
limited in the following situations:
▷
▷
If the time is set incorrectly.
At a predominantly driven speed below ap-
prox. 43 mph/70 km/h.
▷
▷
With a sporty driving style such as during
rapid acceleration or when cornering fast.
In active driving situations such as when
changing lanes frequently.
▷
▷
When the road condition is poor.
In the event of strong side winds.
177
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems
Vehicle features and options Brake assistant
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
The brake assistant automatically applies
maximum braking assistance when the brake
pedal is depressed quickly. This reduces the
braking distance to a minimum for full braking.
Additional information:
To make full use of braking assistance, do not
reduce the pressure on the brake pedal during
full braking.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Antilock Braking System
Drive-off assistant
Principle
Principle
The Antilock Braking System prevents locking
of the wheels while braking.
The drive-off assistant supports driving off on
uphill grades.
You remain able to steer your vehicle even dur-
ing full braking, which increases active driving
safety.
Driving off
1. Hold the vehicle by depressing the brake
pedal.
General information
The Antilock Braking System is ready after
each time drive-ready state is turned on.
2. Release the brake pedal and drive off
quickly.
After the brake pedal is released, the vehicle is
held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Malfunction
Depending on the vehicle loading, the vehicle
may roll back slightly.
The warning light on the instrument
cluster illuminates.
In order to prevent rolling back when driving
off, use the parking brake.
A Check Control message is displayed.
▷
▷
The Antilock Braking System is not availa-
ble.
1.
Pull and release switch before driv-
ing off.
Steerability is limited during full braking.
The parking brake is set.
Have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
2. Step on the accelerator pedal sufficiently to
drive off.
178
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Overview
Dynamic Stability Control
Button in the vehicle
Principle
Dynamic Stability Control helps keep the vehi-
cle on a steady course in critical driving situa-
tions. The drive power is reduced depending
on the situation, and wheels can be braked
individually.
General information
The system detects the following unstable
driving conditions, for instance:
Dynamic Stability Control
▷
▷
Skidding, which can lead to oversteering.
Loss of adhesion of the front wheels, which
can lead to understeering.
Activating/deactivating Dynamic
Stability Control
Safety information
General information
Warning
Dynamic Stability Control is automatically acti-
vated whenever drive-ready state is switched
on.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
If Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated, driv-
ing stability is limited when accelerating and
cornering.
To support driving stability, reactivate Dynamic
Stability Control as soon as possible.
Activating/deactivating the system
1.
Press the button to open the menu.
Warning
2. "DSC OFF"
When driving with a roof load, e.g., roof bars,
the vehicle's center of gravity is higher. This
increases the risk of the vehicle tipping in crit-
ical driving situations. There may be a risk of
accidents or risk of damage to property. Drive
with roof load only with activated Dynamic
Stability Control.
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
3.
Press the button again to reactivate
Dynamic Stability Control.
179
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
lowed snow covered roads or loose road surfa-
ces, but with somewhat limited driving stability.
Displays in the instrument cluster
View when Dynamic Stability
Control is deactivated.
General information
The vehicle has maximum traction when Dy-
namic Traction Control is on. Driving stability
is limited during acceleration and when corner-
ing.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Stability Control is deactivated.
A brief activation of the Dynamic Traction Con-
trol may be useful in the following situations:
Warning light flashes: Dynamic Stabil-
ity Control is regulating the driving and
brake power. The vehicle is stabilized.
Reduce speed and modify your driving style to
the driving circumstances.
▷
▷
▷
When driving in slush or on uncleared,
snow-covered roads.
When driving off from deep snow or loose
ground.
When driving with snow chains.
Warning light illuminates: Dynamic Sta-
bility Control has failed or is initializing.
Driving stabilization is restricted or has
failed.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
If the warning light illuminates continuously,
have the vehicle checked immediately by an
authorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Automatic program change
Dynamic Stability Control can be activated au-
tomatically by Forward Collision Mitigation de-
pending on the situation. Deactivate Forward
Collision Mitigation as necessary.
Dynamic Stability Control
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-
vention, refer to page 160.
Activating/deactivating the Dynamic
Traction Control
Dynamic Traction Control
1.
Press the button to open the menu.
Principle
2. "Traction"
The Dynamic Traction Control is a variant of
the Dynamic Stability Control where the drive
power is optimized.
Dynamic Traction Control is activated and
Dynamic Stability Control is deactivated.
The system ensures maximum drive power
on unusual road conditions, for instance unp-
3.
Press the button again to reactivate
Dynamic Stability Control.
180
Driving stability control systems
CONTROLS
Displays in the instrument cluster
M sport differential
View when Dynamic Traction
Control is activated.
The M Sport differential provides for continu-
ously variable locking of the rear axle differen-
tial, depending on the driving situation. This
prevents spinning of a single rear wheel and
thereby provides optimal traction in any driving
situation.
Indicator light illuminates: Dynamic
Traction Control is activated.
The driver is responsible adapting his or her
driving style to the situation.
Automatic program change
In certain situations, Dynamic Stability Control
is activated automatically:
Variable sport steering
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control
is activated.
The variable sports steering facilitates direct
and agile handling with little steering effort.
The variable sports steering works independ-
ently of the current speed, varying the steering
gear ratio in line with the steering angle.
▷
In case of a brake intervention by For-
ward Collision Mitigation. Deactivate For-
ward Collision Mitigation as necessary.
▷
▷
If the suspension control system fails.
The vehicle has a flat tire.
Additional information:
Forward Collision Mitigation with brake inter-
vention, refer to page 160.
BMW xDrive
Principle
BMW xDrive is the all-wheel-drive system of
the vehicle. Concerted action by the BMW
xDrive and other suspension control systems
such as Dynamic Stability Control further opti-
mizes traction and driving dynamics.
General information
BMW xDrive variably distributes the drive
forces to the front and rear axles as required
by the driving situation and road conditions.
181
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Driver assistance systems
6. "Speed warning"
Vehicle features and options
7. "Warning above:"
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
8. Select the desired setting.
Applying current speed as the
speed warning
Additional information:
1.
Apps menu
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
7. "Adopt current speed"
Speed warning
Principle
The speed warning can be used to set a speed
limit. A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded.
Speed Limit Info
General information
Another warning occurs when the set speed
limit is exceeded again after it has dropped by
3 mph/5 km/h.
Speed Limit Info
Principle
Speed Limit Info shows the currently valid
speed limit in the instrument cluster and, if
necessary, the Head-up display.
Activating/deactivating the speed
warning
1.
Apps menu
General information
2. "Vehicle"
The camera in the area of the interior mirror
detects traffic signs at the edge of the road as
well as overhead sign posts.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
6. "Speed warning"
Traffic signs with extra icons are considered
and compared with the vehicle's onboard data.
The traffic sign will then be either displayed
or ignored depending on the situation in the
instrument cluster and the Head-up display.
Adjusting the speed
1.
Apps menu
The system may also show speed limits that
apply to routes that are not signposted if the
navigation system has current map data.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Safety and warnings"
182
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
For Speed Limit Info to function correctly, cur-
rent map data for the country in which the ve-
hicle is operated must be downloaded.
Info is continuously displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
For information on the current map version
and map updates, see Map update in the Nav-
igation system chapter.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Without a navigation system, the system is
subject to limitations imposed by technology.
Traffic signs with speed limitations are de-
tected and displayed only. Speed limits due to
entering towns/cities, highway signs, etc., are
not displayed. Speed limits with extra traffic
signs are always displayed.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Speed limits"
8. "Show current limit"
Additional information:
▷
Owner's Manual for Navigation, Entertain-
ment, and Communication, refer to page 6.
Display
Speed Limit Info
Safety information
Icon
Description
Warning
Current speed limit.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Depending on the national-
market version, it is possible
to switch between the units of
measurement.
No data on current speed limit
available.
Speed Limit Info not available.
Sensors
Warning signals
The system is controlled by a camera behind
the windshield.
General information
The display flashes if the detected speed limit
is exceeded or the speed limit changes. De-
pending on national-market version, an acous-
tic signal also sounds.
Displaying Speed Limit Info
General information
The Speed Limit Info can be shown or hidden
via iDrive in the instrument cluster. Depending
on the national-market version, Speed Limit
183
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Signal for exceeding speed limit
System limits
The warning for exceeding the maximum per-
missible speed can be activated or deactivated
via iDrive:
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
▷
Camera, refer to page 35.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Functional limitations
The system function may be limited and may
provide incorrect information in the following
situations:
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Warning when speeding"
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Traffic signs are fully or partially concealed
by objects, stickers, or paint.
Traffic signs do not comply with the stand-
ard.
Signal for speed limit change
The warning for speed limit changes can be
activated or deactivated via iDrive:
In areas that are not included in the naviga-
tion system map data.
If navigation system map data is invalid,
outdated, or unavailable.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
When roads deviate from the navigation
such as due to changes in road layout.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
When driving very close to the vehicle in
front of you.
6. "Speed Limit Assistant"
7. "Sound when speed limit changes."
When passing buses or trucks with traffic
signs applied to them.
▷
▷
In case of electronic traffic signs.
Settings
When traffic signs that are valid for a paral-
lel road are detected.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
▷
In the presence of country-specific road
signs or road layouts.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Manual Speed Limiter
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting.
Principle
The Manual Speed Limiter can be used to set
a speed limit, for instance to prevent the vehi-
cle from exceeding speed limits.
184
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The system switches off automatically in the
following situations, for example:
General information
The system can limit the speed, starting at
20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can be driven
at any speed below the set speed limit.
▷
▷
▷
When the engine is switched off.
When Cruise Control is switched on.
When certain driving modes are activated
via Driving Experience Control.
Overview
The displays turn off.
Buttons on the steering wheel
Stopping the speed limiter
If the reverse gear is engaged or in Neutral, the
system is interrupted when rolling backwards.
Button Function
System on/off.
Changing the speed limit
Store current speed.
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Rocker switch:
Changing the speed limit.
Operation
Turning on the speed limiter
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed limit is set.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
to the resistance point, the speed limit in-
creases or decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
The current speed is adopted as the speed
limit.
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
If the system is turned on while the vehi-
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds,
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit.
If the set speed limit is reached or unintention-
ally exceeded such as when driving downhill,
the vehicle is not actively braked.
The marking in the speedometer is set to the
corresponding speed.
When the speed limit is activated, Dynamic
Stability Control is switched on and the vehicle
may change to COMFORT drive mode.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle
coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
The current speed can also be stored by
pressing a button:
Turning off the speed limiter
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
185
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Indicator light
Exceeding the speed limit
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed
limit, a warning is issued.
Icon
Description
The indicator light illuminates: the
system is switched on.
The speed limit can be exceeded intentionally.
Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
The indicator light flashes: the set
speed limit has been exceeded.
When the vehicle speed drops below the set
speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
vated.
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
Warning when the speed limit is
exceeded
Cruise Control without
Distance Control
Visual warning
If the speed limit is exceeded: the
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter flashes while the vehicle speed is
greater than the set speed limit.
Principle
With the Cruise Control, a set speed can be ad-
justed using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the set speed. The sys-
tem accelerates and brakes automatically as
needed.
Acoustic warning
▷
If the speed limit is exceeded unintention-
ally, a signal sounds.
General information
The system can be activated starting at
20 mph/30 km/h.
▷
When the speed limit is reduced to be-
low the current vehicle speed, the signal
sounds after some time.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
▷
When the speed limit is intentionally ex-
ceeded by stepping on the accelerator
pedal all the way down, there is no signal.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Safety information
Display in the speedometer
Warning
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
▷
▷
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive.
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted.
No marking: system is
switched off.
186
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
Button Function
Warning
The use of the system can lead to an in-
creased risk of accidents in the following sit-
uations, for instance:
Cruise control on/off.
▷
▷
▷
On winding roads.
With high traffic volume.
On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or wet
conditions, or on a loose road surface.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
There may be a risk of accidents or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
Interrupt cruise control.
Store current speed.
Warning
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Turning Cruise Control on/off
Warning
Turning on the system
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion enabled or Cruise Control switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch off Forward
Collision Mitigation and Cruise Control before
towing.
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
187
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
When the system is switched on, the current
speed is maintained and stored as the set
speed.
Turning off the system
Depending on the equipment version,
press the relevant button on the steer-
ing wheel.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
Interrupting Cruise Control
Press the button.
Stopping the system manually
When active, press the button.
Changing the speed
Stopping the system automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations, for example:
▷
▷
▷
When braking manually.
Selector lever position D is disengaged.
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
▷
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Adjusting the speed
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
The maximum speed that can be set de-
pends on the vehicle.
▷
Pressing the rocker switch to the resistance
point and holding it: vehicle accelerates or
decelerates without pressure on the accel-
erator pedal.
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted.
After the rocker switch is released, the vehi-
cle maintains its final speed. Pressing the
188
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
switch beyond the resistance point causes
the vehicle to accelerate more rapidly.
Indicator light
Icon
Description
Continuing cruise control
No indicator light: system is switched
off.
Warning
Indicator light green: system is active.
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Gray indicator light: the system has
been interrupted.
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
Displays in the Head-up display
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display.
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
Press the button with the system inter-
rupted.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
System limits
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
Active Cruise Control with
Distance Control
Principle
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
Using the Cruise Control, a desired speed and
a distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
General information
The system maintains the set speed on clear
roads. The vehicle accelerates or brakes auto-
matically.
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
189
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the system
adjusts the speed of the vehicle so that the set
distance to the vehicle ahead is maintained.
The speed is adjusted as far as the given sit-
uation allows.
▷
▷
Set the parking brake.
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
turn the front wheels in the direction of
the curb.
▷
On uphill grades or on downhill slopes,
also secure the vehicle, for instance with
a wheel chock.
The distance can be adjusted at several levels.
For safety reasons, it depends on the respec-
tive speed.
If the vehicle ahead of you brakes to a stand-
still and then drives off again within a brief pe-
riod, the system is able to detect this within the
given system limits.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
Otherwise, drive off on your own such as by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the rocker
switch on the steering wheel.
Depending on the vehicle setting, the cruise
control settings may change under certain
conditions. For instance, acceleration can
change depending on the driving mode.
Warning
Risk of accident is greater when there is a
high speed differential to other vehicles, for
instance in the following situations:
Safety information
▷
▷
▷
When approaching a slowly moving ve-
hicle at speed.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
When approaching stationary vehicles at
speed.
There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Watch surrounding traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
Warning
Individual functions may not work correctly
when towing with Forward Collision Mitiga-
tion enabled or Cruise Control switched on.
There is a risk of accident. Switch off Forward
Collision Mitigation and Cruise Control before
towing.
Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move and
possibly roll away. There is a risk of accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is secured
against rolling away, follow the following:
190
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
The maximum speed that can be set is limited
and depends, for example, on the vehicle and
the vehicle equipment.
Overview
Buttons on the steering wheel
The system can also be activated when sta-
tionary.
Button Function
Cruise control on/off.
Turning Cruise Control on/off or
stopping it
Store current speed.
Turning on the system
Speed Limit Assistant: accept sug-
gested speed manually.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Continue cruise control with the last
setting.
The indicator lights in the instrument cluster
illuminate and the mark on the speedometer is
set to the current speed.
Interrupt cruise control.
Cruise control is active. The current speed is
maintained and stored as desired speed.
Increase the distance.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
Switch Distance Control on/off.
Reduce distance.
Turning off the system
To switch off the system while stationary, step
on brake pedal at the same time.
Switch Distance Control on/off.
Rocker switch:
Set speed.
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Sensors
The displays turn off. The stored set speed is
deleted.
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Stopping the system manually
▷
▷
Cameras behind the windshield.
Front radar sensor.
When enabled, press the button on the
steering wheel.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
If interrupting the system while stationary,
press on the brake pedal at the same time.
Application range
The system is best used on well-maintained
roads.
Stopping the system automatically
The system is automatically interrupted in the
following situations:
The minimum speed that can be set is
20 mph/30 km/h.
▷
▷
When braking manually.
Selector lever position D is disengaged.
191
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
While Dynamic Traction Control is enabled
or Dynamic Stability Control is disabled.
Press the button.
While Dynamic Stability Control regulates
driving stability.
Changing the speed
When the vehicle is stationary, the seat
belt is unbuckled and the driver's door is
opened.
▷
The system has not detected objects for
an extended period, for instance on a
road with very little traffic without curb or
shoulder markings.
▷
▷
The detection range of the radar is im-
paired, for instance by contamination or
heavy precipitation.
Press the rocker switch up or down repeatedly
until the desired speed is set.
After a longer stationary period when the
vehicle has been braked to a stop by the
system.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when the
road is clear.
Adjusting the speed
▷
Each time the rocker switch is tapped to the
resistance point, the set speed increases or
decreases by 1 mph/1 km/h.
Maintaining and storing the speed
▷
Each time the rocker switch is pressed
past the resistance point, the desired speed
changes by a maximum of 5 mph/10 km/h.
Hold the rocker switch in position to repeat the
action.
Adjusting the distance
Safety information
Press the rocker switch up or down once while
the system is interrupted. The system will be
activated.
Warning
The current speed is maintained and stored as
desired speed.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment. Due to the
system limits, deceleration can be late. There
may be a risk of accidents or risk of dam-
age to property. Be aware of the surround-
ing traffic situation at all times. Adjust the
distance to the traffic and weather conditions
and maintain the prescribed safety distance,
possibly by braking.
The stored speed is displayed on the speed-
ometer.
If necessary, the Dynamic Stability Control will
be turned on.
The speed can also be stored by pressing a
button.
192
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Reducing the distance
Changing between Cruise Control
with/without Distance Control
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Safety information
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
Warning
The system does not react to traffic driv-
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains the
stored speed. There may be a risk of acci-
dents or risk of damage to property. Adjust
the set speed to the traffic conditions and
brake as needed.
Increasing the distance
Press the button repeatedly until the
desired distance is set.
Instrument cluster will display selected dis-
tance.
Continuing cruise control
Changing over the Cruise Control mode
Switching Cruise Control without Distance
Control off and on:
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
▷
Press and hold this button.
▷
Press and hold this button.
Switching on distance control:
An interrupted cruise control can be continued
by calling up the stored speed. The difference
between the current speed and the stored
speed should be as little as possible.
▷
Press the button.
Press the button on the steering wheel
with the system interrupted.
▷
Press the button.
After changing, a Check Control message is
displayed.
Cruise control is continued with the stored val-
ues.
Displays in the instrument cluster
In the following cases, the stored speed value
is deleted and cannot be called up again:
General information
Depending on the equipment version, the dis-
plays in the instrument cluster may vary.
▷
▷
When the system is switched off.
When drive-ready state is switched off.
Display in the speedometer
Depending on the equipment, a mark in the
speedometer displays the status of the sys-
tem.
193
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
Green marking: system is ac-
tive, the marking indicates
the desired speed.
Displays in the Head-up display
Set speed
Some system information can also be dis-
played in the Head-up display.
▷
Gray marking: system is in-
terrupted, the marking indi-
cates the stored speed.
The icon is displayed when the set
speed is reached.
▷
No marking: system is switched off.
Indicator lights and warning lights
Depending on the equipment:
Distance information
The icon is displayed when the dis-
tance from the vehicle traveling ahead
is too short.
Icon
Description
White indicator light:
No distance control display, as the
accelerator pedal is being pressed.
The distance information is active in the fol-
lowing situations:
▷
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control
switched off.
Indicator light illuminates green:
Vehicle has been detected ahead of
you.
▷
Display in the Head-up display selected.
Head-up display, refer to page 127.
Distance too short.
The vehicle icon goes out if no vehicle
has been detected ahead of you.
▷
▷
Indicator light flashes green:
Vehicle in front drove off.
Speed greater than approx.
40 mph/70 km/h.
Indicator light illuminates gray:
System interrupted.
System limits
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Indicator light flashes gray:
Conditions are not adequate for the
system to work.
▷
▷
Cameras, refer to page 35.
Radar sensors, refer to page 36.
The system was deactivated but ap-
plies the brakes until you actively
resume control by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
Warning light flashes red and acous-
tic signal sounds:
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
194
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
approaching a truck. When a vehicle driving
ahead of you is reliably detected, the system
requests that the driver intervene by braking
and making an evasive maneuver, if needed.
Detection range
Cornering
The detection capability of the system and the
automatic braking performance are limited.
For instance, two-wheeled vehicles may not be
detected.
When the set speed is too high for a curve,
the speed is reduced slightly. Because curves
may not be anticipated in advance, drive into a
curve at an appropriate speed.
Deceleration
The system does not decelerate in the follow-
ing situations:
▷
For pedestrians or similarly slow-moving
road users.
The system has a limited detection range. Sit-
uations can arise in tight curves where a vehi-
cle driving ahead will not be detected or will be
detected very late.
▷
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
national availability, for red traffic lights.
▷
▷
For cross traffic.
For oncoming traffic.
Merging vehicles
When you approach a curve the system may
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
to the bend of the curve. If the system decel-
erates you may compensate for it by briefly
accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly
merges into your lane, the system may not be
able to automatically restore the selected dis-
tance. It may not be possible to restore the se-
lected distance in certain situations, including if
you are driving significantly faster than vehicles
driving ahead of you, for instance when rapidly
Driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive off
automatically; for example:
195
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
▷
▷
On steep uphill grades.
value, the corresponding system must be acti-
vated.
In front of bumps in the road.
In these cases, step on the accelerator pedal.
Safety information
Weather
Warning
The following restrictions can occur under un-
favorable weather or light conditions:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
▷
▷
Poorer vehicle detection.
Short-term interruptions for vehicles that
are already recognized.
Drive attentively, and react to the current sur-
rounding traffic situation. If necessary, inter-
vene actively, for instance by braking, steering
or making an evasive maneuver.
Drive power
The set speed is also maintained downhill. The
speed may not be maintained on uphill grades
if the drive power is insufficient.
Warning
The set speed can be incorrectly adjusted
or called up by mistake. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust the set speed to the traffic
conditions. Watch surrounding traffic closely
and actively intervene where appropriate.
In ECO PRO driving mode, the vehicle may
exceed or drop below the set desired speed
in some situations, for instance on downhill or
uphill grades.
Speed Limit Assistant
Overview
Principle
Buttons on the steering wheel
Speed Limit Assistant supports driving at the
speed limit. A suggested speed can be ap-
plied.
Button Function
Accept suggested speed manually.
General information
Rocker switch:
When the systems in the vehicle, e.g., Speed
Limit Info, detect a change of the speed limit,
this new speed value can be applied for the
following systems:
Set speed, refer to Cruise Control.
Turning Speed Limit Assistant
on/off
▷
▷
▷
Manual Speed Limiter.
Cruise control.
1.
Apps menu
Active Cruise Control with Distance Control.
2. "Vehicle"
The speed value is suggested as the new de-
sired speed to be applied. To apply the speed
3. "Driving settings"
196
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
Icon
Function
Depending on the equipment version,
the indicator light illuminates green,
together with the icon for a speed
control system:
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. "Speed limits"
8. Select the desired setting:
Speed Limit Assistant is active and
detected speed limits can be applied
manually for the displayed system.
▷
"Adjust manually": detected speed limits
can be applied manually.
▷
"Show anticipation": Depending on the
national-market version: current and up-
coming speed limits are displayed in
the instrument cluster without being ap-
plied.
Detected change of a speed limit with
immediate effect.
Depending on the national-market
version, it is possible to switch be-
tween the units of measurement.
▷
▷
"Show current limit": current speed lim-
its are displayed without being applied
in the instrument cluster.
Indicator light illuminates green: the
detected speed limit can be applied
with the SET button.
"Off": depending on the national-market
version, Speed Limit Info and Speed
Limit Assistant will be turned off.
After it has been applied, a green
checkmark is displayed.
Displays in the instrument cluster
A message is displayed in the instrument clus-
ter when the system and a driver assistance
system are activated.
Manual adoption
A detected speed limit can be applied man-
ually for the active driver assistance system.
When the SET icon illuminates, press
the button.
Speed adjustment
Principle
It can be adjusted whether the speed limit is
applied exactly or with a tolerance.
General information
You can configure a speed adaptation for all
speed limits and an additional speed adapta-
tion for speed limits up to 40 mph/60 km/h.
The additional speed adaptation for speed lim-
its up to 40 mph/60 km/h can be activated or
deactivated.
197
Driver assistance systems
CONTROLS
Setting the speed adjustment
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Driving"
6. "Speed Limit Assistance"
7. Select the desired setting:
▷
"Adjust speed limits": set tolerance for
the speed adaptation that affects all
speeds.
▷
▷
"2nd adjustm. up to": activate or deacti-
vate additional speed adaptation.
"Adjust speed limits": With additional
speed adjustment activated, set the
tolerance for speed limits up to
40 mph/60 km/h.
System limits
Speed Limit Assistant is based on the Speed
Limit Info system.
Consider the system limits of Speed Limit Info.
Additional information:
▷
System limits of Speed Limit Information,
refer to page 184.
▷
System limits of the sensors, refer to
page 35.
198
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking
Safety information
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Parking assistance systems
General information
The parking assistance systems include differ-
ent individual systems. The individual systems
help the driver when parking, maneuvering, or
reversing by providing various assistance func-
tions, sensors, and camera views.
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Additional information:
▷
▷
Rearview camera, refer to page 204.
Automatic camera perspective, refer to
page 204.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Side view, refer to page 205.
3D view, refer to page 206.
Car wash view, refer to page 206.
Panorama View, refer to page 206.
Door opening angle, refer to page 208.
Remote 3D View, refer to page 208.
Park Distance Control, refer to page 209.
Park assistance button
Panorama View
Active Park Distance Control, refer to
page 212.
▷
▷
Automatic Parking Assistant, refer to
page 213.
Sensors
The parking assistance systems are controlled
by the following sensors:
Back-up Assistant, refer to page 217.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
199
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
▷
Radar sensors, side, rear.
Front camera.
Display
Principle
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
With the Park Distance Control display and
various camera views, the parking assistance
systems help you park, maneuver, and reverse
your vehicle.
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Operating concept
General information
The camera-based individual systems are op-
erated with the function bars on the control
display. The camera views can be viewed by
selecting the appropriate icon.
Depending on the equipment, one or more
cameras capture the area from different se-
lectable perspectives.
Depending on the view, the vehicle's surround-
ings or a part of it is depicted.
In the Parking menu, some parking assistance
systems can be configured individually.
Depending on national-market version, the au-
tomatic camera perspective or the rearview
camera is displayed.
Some parking assistance systems can be
started by voice control, e.g., driving in/out of
a parking space with the Automatic Parking
Assistant.
Turning display on/off
Additional information:
General information
BMW Intelligent Personal Assistant, refer to
page 51.
The parking assistance systems view switches
off automatically when driving forwards or if a
certain distance or speed is exceeded.
Calling up Park menu
With reverse
Via Parking Assistant button
When drive-ready state is switched on, the dis-
play is automatically switched on if selector
lever position R is engaged.
1.
Press the button.
"Settings"
2.
Via Parking Assistant button
3. Select the desired settings.
Press the button.
Via iDrive
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Display on the control display
3. "Driving settings"
General information
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. Select the desired settings.
Depending on vehicle equipment and on the
activated parking assistance system, the con-
trol display will vary.
200
Parking
CONTROLS
Without Parking Assistant Plus
The Park Distance Control view is dis-
played.
▷
"Parking"
The view of different camera perspectives
is displayed.
▷
▷
"3D view"
A three-dimensional view is displayed.
"Car wash"
The display of your own lane can be turned
on for easier driving into the car wash.
1
Toolbar, left
2
3
4
Camera image
Vehicle top view
Toolbar, right
Toolbar, right
The parking assistance functions are displayed
in the right toolbar. The display may vary de-
pending on vehicle equipment.
With Parking Assistant Plus
▷
▷
Status of the parking assistance systems.
"Autom. Parking"
Functions of the Automatic Parking Assis-
tant.
▷
▷
"Back-Up Assistant"
Functions of the Back-up Assistant.
"Settings"
Settings in the Park menu.
Status of parking assistance
systems
The status of active parking assistance sys-
tems is indicated by icons in the right-hand
toolbar.
1
Toolbar, left
2
3
4
5
6
7
Camera image
Selection window
Automatic camera perspective
Side view
Rearview camera
Toolbar, right
Toolbar, left
Different views can be selected using the left
toolbar depending on vehicle equipment:
▷
"Rear view camera"
The view of the rearview camera is dis-
played.
▷
"Only park. sensors"
201
Parking
CONTROLS
Meaning
Parking aid lines
Icon
No search for Automatic Parking
Assistant offers.
Pathway lines
Automatic Parking Assistant has
failed.
Search for Automatic Parking As-
sistant offers is active.
Automatic Parking Assistant: if the
icon is green, the Automatic Parking
Assistant is active. The system as-
sumes vehicle control.
Pathway lines help you to estimate the space
required when parking and maneuvering on
level roads.
Back-up Assistant: if the icon is
green, the Back-up Assistant is ac-
tive. The system takes over the
steering.
Lane lines are displayed in front of or behind
the vehicle depending on the gear engaged.
The pathway lines are continuously adjusted
to the steering movements depending on the
steering-wheel angle.
Additional displays
General information
Additional displays can be shown in the cam-
era image of the display of the parking assis-
tance systems, e.g., parking aid lines, to make
parking and maneuvering easier.
Turning circle lines
Several additional displays can be active at the
same time.
Turning additional displays on/off
Via Parking Assistant button
1. Enable the camera image.
Turning circle lines can only be superimposed
on the camera image together with pathway
lines.
2.
"Settings"
3. Select the desired settings.
The lines show the course of the smallest pos-
sible turning circle on a level road.
Via iDrive
1.
Apps menu
Only one turning circle line is displayed after
the steering wheel is turned past a certain an-
gle.
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. Select the desired setting.
202
Parking
CONTROLS
Using parking aid lines
System limits
1. Position the vehicle so that the red turning
circle line leads to within the limits of the
parking space.
Safety information
2. Turn the steering wheel to the point where
the green pathway line covers the corre-
sponding turning circle line.
Warning
Due to its limits, the system may not react, or
it may react too late or in a manner that is not
consistent with normal use. There may be a
risk of accidents or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Actively intervene as warranted. Refer
to the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s operation
and limitations.
Obstacle marking
System limits of the sensors
Additional information:
Sensors of the vehicle, refer to page 35.
Obstacles are detected by the sensors.
Field of view
Because of the camera angle, the areas under
the vehicle cannot be viewed by the cameras.
The obstacles detected by the Park Distance
Control are shown by marks in the camera im-
age.
Colored gradients for the obstacle markings in
green, yellow and red indicate the distances.
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles as well as high, protruding
objects such as ledges may not be detected by
the system.
Functional limitations
The system can be used only to a limited ex-
tent in the following situations:
The objects displayed on the control display
may be closer than they appear. Do not esti-
mate the distance to the objects on the control
display.
▷
▷
▷
With a door open.
With open cargo area.
With exterior mirrors folded in.
Protruding cargo or a rear carrier can limit the
detection range of the camera.
Areas with gray hatching with an icon in the
camera image identify areas that are currently
not shown such as an open door.
Malfunction
A camera failure is displayed on the control
display.
The detection range of the failed camera is
shown shaded on the control display.
203
Parking
CONTROLS
With Parking Assistant Plus
Rearview camera
1.
Press the button.
Principle
2.
Select the icon in the selection window.
The rearview camera helps when reverse
parking and maneuvering. The area behind the
vehicle is shown on the control display.
To exit the rearview camera view, select
another camera view in the selection win-
dow.
Additional views can be shown on the display,
e.g., parking aid lines and obstacle markings.
Deactivated rearview camera
When the rearview camera is deactivated, for
instance when the trunk is open, the camera
image is displayed with gray shading.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Functional requirements
Automatic camera
perspective
▷
The trunk is fully closed.
▷
The camera area is clean and clear.
Principle
Turning the rearview camera on/off
The automatic camera perspective shows a
steering-dependent view in the respective driv-
ing direction.
Turning the camera view on
automatically
This perspective adapts to the respective driv-
ing situation.
When drive-ready state is switched on, the
rearview camera is automatically switched on
if selector lever position R is engaged.
General information
Turning the camera view off
automatically
The rearview camera turns off automatically
when driving forward or when a certain dis-
tance or speed is exceeded.
As soon as obstacles are detected, the view
changes to a fixed display of the area in front
of or behind the bumper, or switches to side
Park Distance Control as necessary.
When the reverse gear is engaged, the auto-
matic camera perspective is exited if necessary
and the rearview camera view is displayed.
If necessary, select the automatic camera per-
spective when reverse gear is engaged. The
automatic camera perspective will then be
maintained for the current parking operation.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
Without Parking Assistant Plus
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
1.
Press the button.
2.
Select the icon on the left toolbar.
To exit the rearview camera view, select
another camera view on the left toolbar.
204
Parking
CONTROLS
Display
Turning the automatic camera
perspective on/off
Turning the camera view on/off
automatically
When the parking assistance systems' display
is turned on, automatic camera perspective is
selected automatically.
The icon in the selection window is selected
automatically.
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
To exit the steering-dependent camera view,
select another camera view in the selection
window.
▷
▷
No markings: no obstacles detected.
Turning the camera view on/off
manually
Color marks: warning against detected ob-
stacles.
System limits
1.
Press the button.
The system only displays stationary obstacles
that were previously detected by sensors while
passing them.
2.
Select the icon in the selection window.
To exit the steering-dependent camera
view, select another camera view in the se-
lection window.
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. For this reason, at stand-
still, the marks are not shown anymore in the
display after a certain time. The area next to
the vehicle must be newly captured.
Side protection
Principle
The side Park Distance Control is automati-
cally displayed when the automatic camera
perspective is turned on. The function shows
obstacles located next to the vehicle.
Side view
Principle
Side view shows the vehicle's side surround-
ings, making it easier to position the vehicle at
the curb or with other obstacles on the side.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
The side view looks from rear to front and, in
case of danger, focuses automatically on pos-
sible obstacles.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
205
Parking
CONTROLS
Turning the side view on/off
The selection window lets you choose the side
view for the left or right side of the vehicle.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Turning the car wash view on/off
1.
Press the button.
2.
Select the icon for the desired vehicle
side in the selection window.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Car wash"
To exit the side view, select another cam-
era view in the selection window.
To exit the car wash view, select a different
camera view in the left toolbar.
3D view
Display
Principle
With 3D view, a circle is displayed around the
vehicle top view in the selection window.
Specified perspectives can be selected on the
circle.
General information
The current perspective is marked with a cam-
era icon.
Your own lane is displayed for easier driving
into a car wash.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
This view can be used to position the vehicle
correctly within the washing system guide rails.
Turning the 3D view on/off
In a car wash, the vehicle must be able to roll
freely forward.
Additional information:
1.
2. "3D view"
To exit the 3D view, select another camera
Press the button.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 116.
view on the left toolbar.
Panorama View
Car wash view
Principle
The panoramic view gives you an earlier view
of crossing traffic at blind driveway exits and
intersections.
Principle
The car wash view helps when driving into a
car wash.
206
Parking
CONTROLS
General information
Automatic activation of panorama
view
Road users concealed by obstacles to the left
and right of the vehicle can only be detected
relatively late from the driver's seat. The front
camera and the rearview camera capture the
area around the side of the vehicle to improve
the view.
Principle
Positions at which panorama view should
switch on automatically can be saved as acti-
vation points.
The camera image shows different levels of
distortion in some areas and is thus not suita-
ble for distance estimations.
General information
Up to ten activation points can be stored.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the function
can be used when driving forward or in re-
verse.
The activation points can be used when driv-
ing forward and, depending on national-mar-
ket version, when reversing.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Follow instructions in the Parking assistance
systems chapter.
Sensors
Functional requirements
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
▷
A GPS signal must be received.
▷
Depending on national-market version: A
BMW ID or driver profile must be activated.
▷
▷
Rearview camera.
Front camera.
▷
The direction of travel, selector lever posi-
tion, and vehicle angle must correspond to
a stored activation point.
Turning the panoramic view on/off
Press the button.
Storing activation points
1. Drive your vehicle to the location where you
want the system to turn on, then stop.
Display
2.
Press the button.
3. "Activation point"
The current position is displayed.
4. "Save activation point"
Activation points are stored with one of the
following pieces of information if possible:
▷
▷
▷
With the city/town.
With the city/town and the street.
With the GPS coordinates.
Yellow lines on the screen display identify the
bumpers of your own vehicle.
Depending on the engaged selector lever posi-
tion, the camera view of the rearview camera
or front camera will be displayed.
207
Parking
CONTROLS
Using activation points
The use of activation points can be switched
on and off.
Display
1.
Press the button.
2. "Settings"
3. "GPS-based"
Displaying activation points
The maximum opening angle of the doors is
displayed in selector lever position P.
1.
Press the button.
2. "Manage points"
System limits
A list of all activation points is displayed.
The system does not provide a warning of ap-
proaching road users.
Editing activation points
The vehicle's surroundings are distorted in the
display for technical reasons.
1.
Press the button.
Even if the door opening angle indicator on the
control display does not overlap with any other
objects, it is necessary to park carefully next to
other objects.
2. "Manage points"
A list of all activation points is displayed.
3. Select an activation point as needed.
4. Select the desired setting.
Because of the perspective, higher, protruding
objects may be closer than they appear on the
control display.
Door opening angle
Remote 3D View
Principle
Depending on vehicle equipment, the door
opening angle display is shown automatically
when stationary.
Principle
The My BMW App and camera views in park-
ing view such as automatic camera perspec-
tive enable you to display the vehicle’s sur-
roundings on a mobile device.
This display helps estimate how far the doors
can be opened when parking.
If obstacle marking is activated, the parking
view indicates fixed obstacles that obstruct the
opening angles of the doors.
The function displays a snapshot of the situa-
tion.
General information
For reasons of data protection, the function
can only be used three times within two hours.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
208
Parking
CONTROLS
▷
▷
The vehicle moves faster than walking
speed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following cam-
eras:
In case of missing or weak Internet connec-
tion.
▷
▷
▷
Front camera.
Top view cameras.
Rearview camera.
Park Distance Control
Functional requirements
Principle
▷
Data transfer must be activated.
Park Distance Control assists with parking.
Acoustic and visual warnings signal obstacles
in front of or behind the vehicle.
Data protection, refer to page 62.
▷
▷
The My BMW App must be installed on the
mobile end device.
Obstacles that are detected by the side ultra-
sonic sensors can also be reported.
ConnectedDrive countries: a BMW ID with
an existing ConnectedDrive account must
be activated.
General information
The range of the system, depending on obsta-
cles and environmental conditions, is approx.
6 ft/2 m.
BMW ID/driver profiles, refer to page 63.
Activating/deactivating Remote 3D
View
The function can be activated or deactivated
individually or together with other functions.
An acoustic warning sounds in case of an im-
pending collision at a distance to the object of
approx. 27 in/70 cm.
For objects behind the vehicle, the acoustic
warning is issued as early as a distance to the
object of approx. 5 ft/1.50 m.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
3. "System settings"
4. "Data privacy"
5. Select the desired setting.
Safety information
After activation, Remote 3D View can be
accessed using the My BMW App.
Warning
Functional limitations
The system may not be fully operational or
may not be available in the following situa-
tions:
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
▷
With a door or the cargo area open. Dark
fields in the display indicate areas that are
not recorded by the system.
▷
▷
With manually folded-in exterior mirrors.
When other camera functions are being
performed in the vehicle.
209
Parking
CONTROLS
Warning
Turning off the system automatically
When driving forward, the system turns off au-
tomatically as needed when a certain distance
or speed is exceeded.
Due to high speeds when the Park Distance
Control is activated, the warning can be de-
layed due to physical circumstances. There is
a risk of injury or risk of damage to property.
Avoid approaching an object too fast. Avoid
driving off quickly while Park Distance Control
is not yet active.
Turning the system on/off manually
Press the button.
▷
▷
On: the LED illuminates.
Off: the LED goes out.
If the system is manually switched on when
the reverse gear is engaged, the rearview
camera image is displayed.
Sensors
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Depending on the national-market version, the
system cannot be turned off manually when
the reverse gear is engaged.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
Acoustic warning
Turning Park Distance Control
on/off
General information
An intermittent tone indicates when the vehicle
is approaching an object. E.g., when an object
is detected at the rear left of the vehicle, a
sound is heard from the rear left speaker.
Turning on the system automatically
The system switches on automatically in the
following situations:
▷
When drive-ready state is switched on
when selector lever position R is engaged.
The shorter the distance to the object, the
shorter the intervals of the intermittent tones.
▷
While approaching detected obstacles
if the speed is lower than approx.
2.5 mph/4 km/h. The activation distance
depends on the situation in question.
When the distance to a detected object is less
than approx. 8 in/20 cm, a continuous tone is
sounded.
When there are objects in front of and behind
the vehicle at the same time, at a distance
smaller than approx. 8 in/20 cm, an alternating
continuous tone will sound between the front
and rear speakers.
The automatic activation of detected obstacles
can be activated or deactivated.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
The intermittent tones and the continuous tone
are turned off when selector lever position P is
engaged.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Automatic PDC activation"
Depending on national-market version, the in-
termittent tones are switched off after a short
time when the vehicle is stationary.
If an object approaches when the vehicle is
stationary, the acoustic signal is reactivated.
210
Parking
CONTROLS
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the acoustic warning can be
adjusted.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "PDC signal volume"
7. Set the desired value.
View behind vehicle.
Visual warning
General information
The approach to an object is displayed on the
control display as soon as the system is acti-
vated.
Objects that are farther away are already dis-
played before a signal sounds.
View next to vehicle.
▷
▷
Shaded area: detection range of sensors.
Depending on the view, pathway lines, turning
circle lines and obstacle markings are shown
for a better estimation of the space required.
Gray shaded area: no obstacles were de-
tected in the detection range.
Depending on the equipment, the detection
range of the sensors is represented by shaded
annular surfaces. Green, yellow, and red mark-
ings indicate when obstacles are detected in
the detection zone.
▷
▷
Colored marks in shaded area: obstacles
were detected in the detection range.
Shaded area interrupted: the area next to
the vehicle has not yet been detected.
If the vehicle is equipped with Cross Traffic
Warning: the display also warns the driver of
vehicles approaching from behind.
System limits
General information
To protect the sides of the vehicle, obstacle
markings are displayed on the sides of the ve-
hicle.
The function for protecting the vehicle sides
only shows stationary obstacles that were pre-
viously detected by the sensors when passing
by.
Display
The system does not detect whether an obsta-
cle moves later on. When the vehicle is station-
ary, the gray shaded areas on the sides are
hidden after a certain time. The area on the
side of the vehicle must be newly captured.
Depending on vehicle equipment, warnings
may be displayed in front of, next to, and be-
hind the vehicle.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
211
Parking
CONTROLS
If the accelerator pedal is depressed longer,
the vehicle drives off. Manual braking is possi-
ble at any time.
Unwarranted warnings
Reaching the system limits can cause unwar-
ranted warnings.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
To prevent unwarranted warnings, for instance
in car washes, turn off automatic Park Dis-
tance Control activation on obstacle detection.
Safety information
Malfunction
Warning
An icon is displayed on the control dis-
play.
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
the detection range of the sensors is not dis-
played on the control display.
A Check Control message is displayed.
Park Distance Control malfunction. Have the
vehicle checked by an authorized service cen-
ter or another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Sensors
Active Park Distance Control
The system is controlled by the following sen-
sors:
Principle
▷
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the rear bumpers.
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
The Park Distance Control brake function ini-
tiates emergency braking if there is an acute
risk of collision.
Deactivating Active Park Distance
Control temporarily
After emergency braking, the function can be
temporarily deactivated on the control display.
General information
Due to system limits, a collision cannot be pre-
vented under all circumstances.
The function is available below walking speed
when driving in reverse or rolling backward.
1. "Obstacle detected. Emergency braking."
2. "Deactivate temporarily"
Pressing the accelerator pedal interrupts the
brake intervention. Emergency braking is not
performed.
During continued driving in this surrounding
situation, no further emergency braking will
occur.
After emergency braking to a stop, further
creeping toward an obstacle is possible. Pro-
ceed with caution. To move forward, lightly
press the accelerator pedal and release as
needed.
The function is automatically reactivated when
Park Distance Control is switched on again.
212
Parking
CONTROLS
The operating principle and operation of the
system is divided into the following steps:
Settings
It is possible to set which areas on the vehicle
will be protected by the system.
▷
▷
▷
▷
Parking space search.
Turning on.
1.
Apps menu
Parking.
2. "Vehicle"
Driving out of parking spaces.
3. "Driving settings"
The parking manoeuver during parking is per-
formed automatically.
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Active PDC emergency braking"
7. Select the desired setting.
When driving out of parallel parking spaces,
the vehicle maneuvers automatically until it
reaches a position where it can be driven out
of the parking space without further steering
movements.
Display
As soon as the system engages, an
icon is displayed with a corresponding
message.
General information
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
System limits
Safety information
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Automatic Parking Assistant
Principle
Automatic Parking Assistant provides support
when parallel parking and parking transverse
to the road.
In addition, the system makes it easier to park
out of parallel parking spaces.
The ultrasonic sensors measure both sides of
the vehicle when driving slowly forward. Suita-
ble parking spaces are calculated based on the
objects detected, e.g., parking vehicles. The
system status is displayed.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
The system calculates the best possible park-
ing line for driving in or out of parking spaces,
and takes control of the vehicle while parking.
213
Parking
CONTROLS
Parking methods
Functional requirements
Park Assist supports the following functions:
Measurement of parking spaces
▷
Maximum speed while driving forward ap-
prox. 22 mph/35 km/h.
▷
Maximum distance to row of parked vehi-
cles: 5 ft/1.5 m.
Suitable parking space
Longitudinal parking:
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
Parallel parking: reverse parking parallel to the
road.
Minimum length of gap between two ob-
jects: own vehicle length plus approx.
2.6 ft/0.8 m.
▷
Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
Perpendicular parking:
▷
▷
▷
Minimum length of a detected object, e.g., a
parking vehicle: approx. 3 ft/1 m.
Minimum width of the gap: own vehicle
width plus approx. 2.3 ft/0.7 m.
Minimum depth: own vehicle length.
Perpendicular parking: reverse parking per-
pendicular to the road.
The depth of perpendicular parking spaces
must be estimated by the driver. Due to
technical limitations, the system is only able
to approximate the depth of perpendicular
parking spaces.
Parking operation
▷
Doors and cargo area are closed.
▷
Driver's seat belt is fastened.
Leaving parking spaces
Driving out of parallel parking spaces.
▷
The vehicle was parked using the Auto-
matic Parking Assistant, and an object has
been detected in the area around the vehi-
cle.
Sensors
The Automatic Parking Assistant is controlled
by the following sensors:
▷
The vehicle was manually parked in re-
verse, and objects have been detected in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. The
▷
Ultrasonic sensors in the front/rear bump-
ers.
▷
Ultrasonic sensors, side.
214
Parking
CONTROLS
distance to a detected curb is at least 6 in-
ches/15 cm.
At the end of the parking operation, selec-
tor lever position P is set.
▷
The parking space is at least 2.6 ft/0.8 m
longer than the vehicle.
The end of the parking operation is indi-
cated on the control display.
5. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
needed.
Turning the signal tone on/off
The signal tone for suitable parking spaces
can be turned on and off.
Driving out of a parking space using
the Automatic Parking Assistant
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "Driving settings"
2.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
4. "Driver Assistance"
5. "Parking and maneuvering"
6. "Sound when available"
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
3. Select the desired direction for driving out
of the parking space on the control display.
Parking using the Automatic
Parking Assistant
1. For the parking space search when driving
past parked vehicles at a speed of up to
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h and a distance of
max. 5 ft/1.5 m.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
Green: the system takes control of ma-
neuvering.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
The parking space search is activated.
A message will be displayed at the end of
the maneuver.
2. Press the
gear.
button or engage reverse
5. Make sure that the traffic situation permits
driving out of parking space and driving off
as usual.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
The status of the parking space search and
possible parking spaces are displayed on
the control display.
The Automatic Parking Assistant is turned
off automatically.
3. Select suggested parking method.
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant manually
The Automatic Parking Assistant can be can-
celed manually at any time, e.g.:
Green: the system takes control of the
parking operation.
4. Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play.
▷
Press the button.
The speed can be reduced with the brake.
Other interventions will cancel the system.
▷
"Autom. Parking": select the icon on the
control display.
Depending on national-market version, an
intermittent or continuous tone sounds for
Park Distance Control.
215
Parking
CONTROLS
Canceling Automatic Parking
Assistant automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
System limits
General information
Follow the system limits in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
No parking assistance
The Automatic Parking Assistant does not of-
fer assistance in the following situations:
▷
▷
Possibly on snow-covered or slippery road.
When there are obstacles that are hard to
overcome such as curbs.
▷
▷
▷
In tight curves.
▷
▷
▷
When there are obstacles that suddenly ap-
pear.
For diagonal parking spaces.
For parking spaces that are only marked
with lines on the ground. The system ori-
ents itself according to objects.
With insufficient distances, which are indi-
cated by Park Distance Control.
When a maximum number of parking at-
tempts or the time taken for parking is ex-
ceeded.
▷
For special parking spaces, e.g., metered
parking spaces with automatic locking
mechanisms, or mechanical parking sys-
tems.
▷
▷
When changing over to another function on
the control display.
Under certain environmental conditions, park-
ing out with Park Assist may be temporarily
unavailable. The system limits of the Park Dis-
tance Control and the Automatic Parking As-
sistant continue to apply.
The turn signal opposite to the desired
parking side is switched on.
▷
▷
▷
▷
With open cargo area.
With the doors open.
When setting the parking brake.
Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
situations:
When operating the accelerator pedal or
the selector lever.
▷
▷
The brake pedal remains depressed for
longer while the vehicle is at a standstill.
▷
On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
roads.
When unfastening the driver's seat belt.
▷
▷
▷
On slippery ground.
A Check Control message is displayed where
applicable.
On steep uphill or downhill grades.
With accumulations of leaves/snow in the
parking space.
Continuing the parking operation
If parking or leaving a parking space has been
interrupted, the operation can be continued, if
needed.
▷
▷
▷
In case of changes to an already-measured
parking space.
With ditches or edges, for instance an edge
of a port.
Restart the Automatic Parking Assistant and
follow the instructions on the control display.
Parking spaces that are not suitable may
be detected or suitable parking spaces may
not be detected at all.
216
Parking
CONTROLS
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed.
Warning
The system can steer the vehicle over or
onto curbs. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Watch surrounding
traffic closely and actively intervene where
appropriate.
The Automatic Parking Assistant has malfunc-
tioned. Have the vehicle checked by an author-
ized service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Back-up assistant
Functional requirements
▷
▷
▷
Drive forward without interruption to store
the distance covered.
Principle
The Back-up Assistant helps when reversing,
e.g., when pulling out of tight or unclear park-
ing or road situations.
To store the distance covered, do not drive
faster than 22 mph/35 km/h.
Dynamic Stability Control is activated.
General information
Driving in reverse with automated
steering
1. Turn on drive-ready state.
The vehicle stores the driving movements of
the last distance covered. This stored distance
can be driven in reverse with automated steer-
ing.
The system takes over the steering. The driver
must control the speed using the accelerator
and brake pedals.
2.
3.
With the vehicle at a standstill, press
button or engage reverse gear.
The parking assistance systems view is
displayed.
A maximum of 164 ft/50 m are stored.
Follow the information in the "Parking assis-
tance systems" chapter.
"Back-Up Assistant"
Follow the instructions on the control dis-
play where required.
Safety information
4. Take your hands off the steering wheel and
carefully drive in reverse with the accelera-
tor pedal and the brake.
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute for
the driver’s personal judgment in assessing
the traffic situation. Based on the limits of
the system, it cannot independently react
to all traffic situations. There is a risk of
accident. Adjust driving style to traffic condi-
tions. Watch the surrounding traffic situation
closely, be ready to take over steering and
braking at any time, and actively intervene
where appropriate.
Green: the system takes control of
steering.
When driving in reverse, observe the vehi-
cle's surroundings.
In case of obstacles, stop immediately and
take over control of the vehicle. Follow the
instructions for Park Distance Control.
5. Right before the end of the stored distance
covered, a signal tone will sound and a
message is displayed.
217
Parking
CONTROLS
Stop no later than when normal road traffic
is reached and take control of the vehicle
such as by shifting to forward gear.
A warning is issued at a speed of approx.
4 mph/7 km/h.
If the maximum speed is exceeded, the
function is interrupted.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
manually
The assisted reversing by the Back-up Assis-
tant can be canceled manually:
▷
After driving a stored distance covered with
major steering-wheel angles, the function
of the system will be limited for the return
trip.
Different influences can lead to side deviations
when driving the stored distance covered in re-
verse. For example, this includes the following
factors:
▷
▷
Via touchscreen:
"Back-Up Assistant"
Press the button.
▷
Steering movements when the vehicle is
stationary while storing the distance cov-
ered.
Canceling the Back-up Assistant
automatically
The system automatically cancels in situations
such as the following:
▷
▷
▷
The speed is not adapted to the distance
covered.
Certain road characteristics such as gradi-
ents, inclines or slippery road surface.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
When the driver grasps the steering wheel
or takes over steering.
Greatly deviating conditions when storing
and driving the route, for instance other
tires or changed ambient conditions like
weather.
When shifting from reverse to another se-
lector lever position.
During activation or intervention by driver
assistance systems.
Also follow the information on system limits in
the "Parking assistance systems" chapter.
After an extended period of time when the
vehicle is stationary.
When exiting the stored lane when revers-
ing, for instance with maximum steering-
wheel angle.
▷
When the view on the control display is
overlaid with messages.
▷
▷
In case of a slippery surface.
When the vehicle is rolling such as on a
slope.
▷
▷
In case of changed ambient conditions.
If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
6 mph/9 km/h.
System limits
▷
The maximum speed when reversing is
limited to approx. 6 mph/9 km/h.
218
Driving comfort
CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options BMW IconicSounds
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Depending on vehicle equipment and national-
market version, the vehicle drive sound can be
adjusted using BMW IconicSounds.
1.
Apps menu
Additional information:
2. "Vehicle"
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
3. "Driving settings"
4. "Drivetrain and chassis"
5. "IconicSounds"
Adaptive M chassis
6. Select the desired setting.
Principle
The Adaptive M chassis is an intelligent, con-
trollable sport chassis.
The chassis reduces body movements with a
sporty driving style or on an uneven road.
General information
The intelligent control of the chassis increases
the driving dynamics and driving comfort de-
pending on the road condition and driving
style.
Setting
The system offers different shock absorber
settings ranging from comfortable travel to
sporty driving.
The shock absorbers are adjusted depending
on the selected driving mode as well as the
road condition and driving style.
Additional information:
Driving Experience Control, refer to page 119.
219
Climate control
CONTROLS
Climate control
Icon
Function
Vehicle features and options
Fresh air.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Air flow.
Additional information:
Air distribution.
SYNC program.
Seat heating.
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Climate control
Overview
Functions in the Climate menu
Icon
Function
Buttons, automatic climate control
Turn the climate control sys-
tem on/off.
Automatic program.
Temperature.
Air conditioning.
Icon
Function
Defrost function.
Maximum cooling.
Air recirculation mode.
Rear window defroster.
Automatic recirculated-air con-
trol.
220
Climate control
CONTROLS
Buttons, rear automatic climate control
Turning the air conditioning system
on/off
The climate control system can be turned on or
off via iDrive.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2.
Tap the power button.
Icon
Function
The entire climate control system is turned on
or off with the last settings applied.
Automatic program.
When the air conditioning system is turned
on, individual climate control functions can be
turned off.
Temperature.
Air distribution.
Switching off.
Settings
You can configure individual settings for cli-
mate control functions via iDrive, e.g.:
▷
▷
Intensity of seat heating.
Pre-ventilation.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Calling up climate control functions
The Climate menu can be accessed via iDrive:
2. "Individual settings" or "General settings"
3. Select the desired setting.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu on
the menu bar.
Turning rear automatic climate
control on/off
Or:
1.
Apps menu
Functional requirements
2. "Vehicle"
▷
Automatic climate control is turned on.
3. "Climate control"
▷
Defrost function is deactivated.
Via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
221
Climate control
CONTROLS
4. "Rear climate control"
the outside temperature, interior temperature,
sunlight, seat occupancy and the desired tem-
perature setting:
5. Select the desired setting.
The rear automatic climate control can be ac-
tivated with standard setting for temperature
and AUTO program:
▷
▷
▷
▷
Air flow.
Air distribution.
Temperature.
Seat heating.
"Activate with default settings"
Switching on using the button
Press one of the following buttons:
The automatic program takes seat occupancy
into account, regulating the climate in an en-
ergy-efficient manner that is tailored to the oc-
cupants.
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Automatic program.
Air distribution, manual.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the automatic program in order to prevent
window condensation to the extent possible.
Switching off using the button
Press the button.
Overview
Locking the rear automatic climate
control
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
1
Settings
3. "Second row of seats"
4. "Lock rear climate control"
2
3
4
5
Air flow intensity
Climate control functions bar
Temperature
Automatic program
Seat heating
Steering wheel heating
Principle
The automatic program ensures a comforta-
ble climate, which can be modified with the
desired temperature and individual settings.
The automatic program cools, ventilates or
heats the vehicle interior automatically.
General information
Depending on the equipment, the automatic
program provides the best possible settings
for climate control functions depending on
222
Climate control
CONTROLS
The individually selected settings of the cli-
mate control functions are stored and auto-
matically set up again such as after the vehicle
is started again.
Turning the automatic program
on/off
The AUTO program can be switched on or off
via iDrive.
Display
The indicator on the menu bar provides infor-
mation about the temperature difference be-
tween the configured desired temperature and
current interior temperature.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2.
Tap the AUTO program button.
▷
The red or blue bar next to the temperature
display indicates the progress of heating or
cooling.
Switching the rear climate control
automatic program on/off
▷
The desired interior temperature is reached
as soon as the bar is no longer displayed.
Using the button
Active climate control functions, e.g., seat
heating, are indicated by the icons on the
menu bar.
Press the button.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the automatic program is turned
on.
Temperature
Setting the intensity
Principle
When the automatic program is activated,
the intensity of individual climate control func-
tions, e.g., seat heating, is adjusted individu-
ally.
The automatic climate control cools or heats
to the configured temperature and then keeps
the temperature constant.
General information
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Do not rapidly switch between different tem-
perature settings. Otherwise, the automatic cli-
mate control will not have sufficient time to ad-
just the set temperature.
2. "Individual settings"
3. Select the desired setting, e.g.:
▷
▷
▷
"LOW"
"MEDIUM"
"HIGH"
Each level has a specific control range of the
intensity.
Based on the stored data models, the intensi-
ties are dynamically adjusted while driving. It is
not necessary to manually change the desired
intensity to lower or higher levels while driving.
223
Climate control
CONTROLS
Adjusting the upper body temperature
Setting the temperature
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Temp. adjustment upper body"
4. Increase or decrease temperature.
Air flow
You can set the desired temperature for driver
and front passenger individually on the menu
bar.
General information
The air flow generated by the blower can be
adjusted as needed.
▷
▷
Raise the temperature.
Lower temperature.
Adjusting the air flow
The air flow can be set via iDrive.
Setting the rear automatic climate
control temperature
Via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
The air flow may be reduced to preserve the
vehicle battery.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "Individual settings"
3. "Second row of seats"
4. Set the desired temperature.
Air distribution settings
Principle
The air distribution can be adjusted as re-
quired in manual mode.
Using the button
Press the left or right button side to set
the desired temperature.
Adjusting the air distribution
The air distribution can be set via iDrive:
Upper body temperature
General information
The air temperature in the upper body area
can be adjusted.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
This does not change the set interior tempera-
ture for the driver and front passenger.
2.
Tap the air distribution icon on the
climate control functions bar.
3. Select the desired setting:
224
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Aim the air flow downward, arrow 1.
Aim the air flow upward, arrow 2.
Switching the cooling function on/off
The air conditioning can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
Aim the air flow at the windshield , ar-
row 3.
The selected air distribution is displayed.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2.
Tap the air conditioning button.
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid
window condensation.
Depending on the weather, the windshield and
the side windows may fog up briefly when
drive-ready state is switched on.
Adjusting the air distribution of the
rear climate control
When using the cooling mode, condensation
that will exit below the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly. Select the
desired setting.
Maximum cooling
The selected air distribution is shown
on the rear climate control display.
Principle
Maximum cooling lets you cool the vehicle in-
terior quickly and effectively.
Air conditioning
The lowest temperature and the maximum air
flow are set automatically.
Principle
The function is automatically activated in the
rear when the SYNC program is turned on.
With the climate control function, the air inside
the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified, then
warmed again depending on the temperature
settings.
Functional requirement
The function is available at an outside temper-
ature above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with the
drive-ready state switched on.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
225
Climate control
CONTROLS
button until the desired operating mode is
set.
Turning maximum cooling on/off
Maximum cooling can be turned on or off via
iDrive:
▷
▷
▷
Recirculating air.
Fresh air.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Automatic air recirculation.
2.
Tap the maximum cooling button.
In recirculated-air mode, air conditioning is au-
tomatically switched on to dry the air and avoid
window condensation.
Air flows out of the air vents to the upper body
area. Open the vents.
Depending on vehicle equipment, air recircula-
tion will turn off automatically based on ambi-
ent conditions in order to prevent window con-
densation.
Air recirculation mode
Principle
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
tants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the interior air.
SYNC program
Principle
In automatic recirculated-air control mode, out-
side air is fed in or the interior air recirculated
depending on the outside air quality.
If SYNC program is activated, the settings on
the driver's side are transfered to the passeng-
er's side and to the rear.
When the air recirculation is turned off, outside
air is directed into the interior.
If the SYNC program is deactivated, the follow-
ing settings are made automatically in the au-
tomatic program depending on the seat occu-
pancy:
General information
If there is window condensation, turn off the air
recirculation.
▷
If the front passenger's seat is not occu-
pied, the settings on the driver's side are
applied.
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
▷
If the seats in the rear are unoccupied, the
default settings are applied.
Turning air recirculation on/off
Air recirculation mode can be switched on or
off via iDrive:
General information
The following settings can be transferred:
▷
▷
▷
Temperature.
Air distribution.
Automatic program.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. The current operating mode is displayed on
the climate control functions bar. Tap the
226
Climate control
CONTROLS
Make sure that air is able to flow to the wind-
shield and front side windows.
Turning the SYNC program on/off
The SYNC program can be switched on or off
via iDrive:
Rear window defroster
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Principle
With the rear window defroster, ice and con-
densation are quickly removed from the rear
window.
2.
Tap the SYNC program button.
If the settings on the front passenger side or in
the rear are changed, the program is automati-
cally switched off.
Functional requirement
Standby or drive-ready state is switched on.
Defrost function
Turning the rear window defroster
on/off
Principle
Press the rear window heating button
on the instrument panel.
With the defrost function, ice and condensation
are quickly removed from the windshield and
the front side windows.
The LED is illuminated with rear win-
dow defroster switched on.
The air flow and air temperature are automati-
cally optimized for the removal of ice and con-
densation.
The rear window defroster switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time.
The air distribution is directed toward the
windshield and front side windows.
Seat heating
If there is window condensation, turn on the
automatic program to take advantage of the
condensation sensor.
Principle
The system heats the seats as necessary.
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
General information
If the trip is continued within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the functions
are turned on automatically with the tempera-
ture that was last set.
Turning the defrost function on/off
Press the defrost button on the instru-
ment panel.
The LED of the button is illuminated
when the system is switched on.
Adjusting seat heating
Automatic program
When the defrost function is turned on, the rear
automatic climate control is deactivated to pro-
vide maximum performance.
When the automatic program is activated, the
intensity of seat heating can be adjusted: As
you drive, the heater output is automatically
adjusted according to your set intensity.
227
Climate control
CONTROLS
Adjusting seat heating manually
The heater output level can be adjusted man-
ually:
Front ventilation
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
row 1.
1. Tap the icon for seat climate control on the
menu bar, arrow 1.
Thumbwheel for the variable adjustment of
the air flow on the vents, arrows 2.
2.
Press the seat heating button re-
peatedly until the desired level is selected,
arrow 2.
Ventilation in the rear
If a consumption-optimized drive mode is se-
lected, the heater output is reduced.
Ventilation
Principle
▷
▷
Lever for changing the airflow direction, ar-
row 1.
The ventilation system offers individual ranges
of adjustment for direct or indirect ventilation
to optimize the air flows in the vehicle.
Thumbwheel for variable opening and clos-
ing of the air vents, arrow 2.
General information
Open the air vents and position them to ensure
effective climate control.
Setting the ventilation
Depending on the desired ventilation, align the
air flow directly or indirectly toward the pas-
sengers.
The air flow heats or cools noticeably, depend-
ing on the set desired temperature.
Air quality
General information
The air quality in the interior is improved by the
following components:
228
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
▷
Emission tested passenger compartment.
Interior filter.
Functional requirements
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
Air conditioning system to control the
temperature, air flow and recirculated-air
mode.
▷
The vehicle battery is sufficiently charged.
If pre-ventilation is switched on, the vehicle
battery will be discharged. Thus, limit the
maximum activation time to save the vehi-
cle battery. The system will be available
again after the engine is started or after a
short trip.
▷
Pre-ventilation.
Interior filter
The interior filter cleans the incoming fresh
air or the circulated interior air in recirculation
mode.
▷
▷
Time and date are set correctly.
The ventilation air vents are open.
Depending on the equipment:
Switching pre-ventilation on/off
▷
Dust and pollen is filtered out from the in-
flowing air.
▷
▷
▷
Nano-particle emissions are reduced.
Gaseous pollutants are filtered.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Microbial particles, viruses and allergens
are filtered.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
The manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
having the interior filter changed during vehicle
maintenance.
4. Select the desired setting.
Departure time
General information
Different departure times can be set to ensure
a comfortable interior temperature in the vehi-
cle at the time of departure.
Pre-ventilation
Principle
The car's interior can be cooled or heated
before driving off with the pre-ventilation. De-
pending on set temperature and ambient tem-
perature, the car's interior is ventilated or pos-
sibly heated using the residual engine heat.
▷
One-time departure time: the time can be
set.
The system is switched on once.
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week can be set.
General information
The system can be switched on and off directly
or via a preset departure time.
On the desired weekdays, the system will
be switched on before the set departure
time.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
The activation time is determined based on
the outside temperature. The system promptly
switches on before the selected departure
time.
▷
▷
Set departure times.
Activate departure times.
A minimum of 10 minutes should pass be-
tween setting and activating the departure
The system switches off automatically after a
certain period of time. The system continues to
run for some time after being switched off.
229
Climate control
CONTROLS
time and the planned departure time to allow a
sufficient period of time for the climate control.
Pre-conditioning through
Remote Engine Start
Setting the departure time
Principle
Pre-conditioning cools or heats the car's inte-
rior prior to start of the trip to a comfortable
temperature. The system automatically cools,
vents, and heats depending on the interior, ex-
ternal, and set temperature. Snow and ice may
be removed more easily.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Select the desired departure time.
6. Set the desired departure time.
7. Select day of the week, if needed.
The system starts the engine automatically
and allows it to run for a limited period of time.
Safety information
Activating the departure time
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventilation
is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases can pol-
lute the area in and around the vehicle or
penetrate the vehicle. The exhaust gases
contain pollutants which are colorless and
odorless. In enclosed areas or areas with in-
sufficient ventilation, exhaust gases can also
accumulate outside of the vehicle. There is a
danger to life. Keep the exhaust pipe free and
ensure sufficient ventilation. Do not switch on
stationary climate control in enclosed areas
or areas with insufficient ventilation, e.g. in
enclosed garages.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-ventilation"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
Display
Icon
Description
Icon on the instrument
panel.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Warning
Icon flashes: pre-ventila-
tion is switched on.
When stationary climate control is in opera-
tion, high temperatures can occur underneath
the body, for instance caused by the exhaust
system. If combustible materials such as
leaves or grass come in contact with hot
parts of the exhaust system, these materi-
als can ignite. There is a risk of fire. Make
sure that no combustible materials can come
in contact with hot vehicle parts during sta-
tionary climate control operation, e.g. leaves,
Activating with My BMW App
Depending on vehicle equipment, the My BMW
App with remote functionality can be used to
turn on pre-cooling at a preset departure time
or immediately.
230
Climate control
CONTROLS
grass, gas, gasoline, oil or other combustible
objects.
Switching on via iDrive
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
Functional requirements
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Start now"
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
The vehicle is in idle state or standby state.
Battery is sufficiently charged.
The fuel tank capacity is sufficient.
Hood is closed.
Switching on/off via vehicle key
The system can be switched on and off using
the vehicle key.
Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
are set correctly.
▷
Air vents are opened.
Press the button on the vehicle key
three times within 1 second.
Enabling the automatic engine start
function
The automatic engine start must be enabled
before using the system. Otherwise, the en-
gine cannot switch on automatically to clima-
tize the car's interior.
After operating the vehicle key, it will
take approximately 3 seconds until the engine
is switched on.
To switch off the system, press the button
again three times.
Switching off with the Start/Stop
button
The system can be switched off directly by
pressing the Start/Stop button without de-
pressing the brake pedal.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Remote Engine Start"
5. "Start engine for climate cont."
6. Confirm the disclaimer.
Climate control for departure time
General information
Scheduled departure times can be set up in
the system to ensure a comfortable interior
temperature in the vehicle at the time of depar-
ture.
Turning on/turning off the pre-
conditioning
General information
The system switches off automatically after
max. 15 minutes for safety reasons.
▷
One-time departure time: the time of the
scheduled departure can be set.
The system is switched on once.
The system can be switched on a maximum of
two times in a row.
▷
Departure time with weekday: time and day
of the week of the scheduled departure can
be set.
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
The departure time is preselected in two steps:
231
Climate control
CONTROLS
▷
▷
Set departure times.
Display
Activate departure times.
In the instrument cluster:
The system is activated automatically a few
minutes before the set departure time. The
system remains switched on for a short time
after the set departure time.
The engine runs for the purpose
of operating the pre-condition-
ing. The vehicle is not ready to
drive.
For safety reasons, the air conditioning can
only be activated once for the departure time.
Icon
Description
The system will be available again as soon
as the drive-ready state is activated and deac-
tivated again.
Icon on the instrument
panel.
Icon illuminates: a depar-
ture time is activated.
Observe the information about the intended
use of the vehicle.
Icon flashes: pre-condition-
ing is switched on.
Additional information:
For Your Own Safety, refer to page 8.
Confirmation signals from the
vehicle
Setting the departure time
The activation of the system is confirmed by
flashing twice.
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
The parking lights are switched on as long as
the system is switched on.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Set the departure time.
6. Select day of the week, if needed.
Activating the departure time
1.
Tap the icon for the Climate menu
on the menu bar.
2. "General settings"
3. "Pre-conditioning"
4. "Departure plan"
5. Activate the desired departure time.
232
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Interior equipment
of damage to property. Make sure that the
travel path of the respective system is clear
during programming and operation. Also fol-
low the safety information for the hand-held
transmitter.
Vehicle features and options
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Compatibility
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
If this icon is printed on the packaging
or in the operating instructions of the
remote-controlled system, the system
is generally compatible with the integrated uni-
versal remote control.
Integrated universal remote
control
Additional questions are answered by:
Principle
▷
An authorized service center or another
qualified service center or repair shop.
The integrated universal remote control in the
interior mirror can operate remote-controlled
systems such as garage door openers, alarm
systems or locking systems.
▷
on the Internet.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gentex
Corporation.
For any additional questions, contact an au-
thorized service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
General information
The integrated universal remote control re-
places up to three different hand-held trans-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions.
Control elements on the interior
mirror
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system near metal objects
to ensure the best possible operation.
Safety information
Warning
▷
▷
▷
Buttons, arrow 1.
LED, arrow 2.
The operation of remote-controlled systems
with the integrated universal remote control
such as the garage door may result in injury,
for example, body parts becoming jammed in
a garage door. There is a risk of injury or risk
Hand-held transmitter of the remote-con-
trolled system, arrow 3.
233
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Press and hold the button on the interior
mirror for approx. 2 seconds. Perform
this procedure three times.
Programming the integrated
universal remote control
If the integrated universal remote con-
trol remains nonoperational, continue
with the special features for rolling code
radio systems.
Functional requirement
The battery of the hand-held transmitter must
be fully charged at the time of programming
to ensure an optimal range of the integrated
universal remote control.
▷
LED does not illuminate green after
60 seconds: programming not com-
pleted.
Programming individual buttons
1. Park the vehicle within range of the remote-
controlled system.
Repeat steps 3 to 5.
Special feature of the rolling code
wireless system
For systems with a rolling code radio system,
the integrated universal remote control and the
system also have to be synchronized.
2. Turn on standby state.
3. Select desired button on the interior mirror:
▷
Program available button:
Press the button.
▷
Program already assigned button:
Refer to information on synchronization in the
operating instructions of the remote-controlled
system.
Press and hold the button for approx.
20 seconds.
The LED on the interior mirror will slowly
begin flashing orange.
1. Program the desired button on the interior
mirror.
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the
remote-controlled system approx. 1 to
12 in/2.5 to 30 cm away from the buttons
on the interior mirror.
2. Locate and press the synchronizing button
on the remote-controlled system such as
on the garage door.
You have approx. 30 seconds for the next
step.
The required distance depends on the
hand-held transmitter.
Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
second person.
5. Press and hold the button on the hand-held
transmitter.
3. Press and hold the programmed button on
the interior mirror for approx. 3 seconds.
Canada: if programming with the hand-held
transmitter was interrupted, hold down the
interior mirror button and repeatedly press
and release the hand-held transmitter but-
ton for 2 seconds.
If necessary, repeat this step up to three
times in order to end synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the program-
med function will be carried out.
6. The LED can illuminate in different ways:
Operation
After programming, the remote-controlled sys-
tem can be operated with the button on the
interior mirror.
▷
The LED illuminates green: program-
ming completed.
Release button.
▷
The LED flashes green rapidly: the
hand-held transmitter was detected but
programming is not complete.
234
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Press and hold the desired button of the re-
mote-controlled system within range until the
function is triggered.
Sockets
Principle
The socket can be used for electronic devi-
ces when the standby or drive-ready state is
switched on.
The LED on the interior mirror is continuously
illuminated green during the transmission of
the radio signal.
Deleting a button assignment
The button assignment cannot be deleted indi-
vidually.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Press and hold the two outer buttons on
the interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
mately 10 seconds until the LED flashes green
rapidly.
Do not damage the socket by using unsuitable
connectors.
Safety information
All stored button assignments will be deleted.
Warning
Sun visor
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags such as portable navigation devi-
ces can hinder the unfolding of the airbag or
be thrown around in the car's interior while
unfolding. There is a risk of injury and risk of
damage to property. Make sure that devices
and cables are not in the airbag's area of
unfolding.
Glare shield
Fold the sun visor down or up.
Glare shield from the side
Folding the sun visor out
1. Fold the sun visor down.
2. Detach it from the holder and swing it to-
ward the side window.
Warning
Battery chargers that charge the vehicle bat-
tery via sockets or cigarette lighters in the ve-
hicle may overload or damage the 12 V elec-
trical system. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Only connect battery
chargers for the vehicle battery to the jump-
start terminals in the engine compartment.
3. Shift it back to the desired position.
Folding the sun visor in
Proceed in the reverse order to close the sun
visor.
Vanity mirror
A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor be-
hind a cover.
235
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
Warning
In the center armrest
If metal objects fall into the socket, they can
cause a short circuit. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Insert the ciga-
rette lighter or socket cover again after using
the socket.
Front center console
1. Press on the cover.
A USB port is located in the center armrest.
Properties:
▷
▷
▷
USB port Type C.
For charging mobile devices.
Charge current: max. 3 A.
In the front center console
NOTICE
2. A socket is located between the cup hold-
ers. Detach the cover.
Objects in the storage compartment, e.g.,
large USB connectors, may block or damage
the cover when it is being opened or closed.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that the area of movement of the cover
is clear while opening and closing it.
USB port
General information
Follow the information regarding the connec-
tion of mobile devices to the USB port in the
section on USB connections.
If necessary, push on the cover.
Additional information:
USB connection, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
igation, Entertainment, Communication;
236
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
not function correctly. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects on the tray together with the device.
Overview
Tray in the center console:
A USB port is located in the center console.
Properties:
▷
▷
USB port Type A.
For charging mobile devices and for data
transfer.
▷
Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
1
LED
Wireless charging tray
2
Storage area
Principle
Functional requirements
The wireless charging tray allows wireless
charging of mobile phones and other mobile
devices certified according to the Qi standard.
▷
The device to be charged must be certified
according to the Qi standard.
▷
▷
Standby state is switched on.
General information
The mobile phone must not exceed the
maximum size of approximately 6.0 x 3.1
x 0.7 in/154.5 x 80 x 18 mm.
When inserting the device to be charged, make
sure that there are no objects between the de-
vice to be charged and the wireless charging
tray.
▷
▷
Protective sleeves and covers must be suit-
able for wireless charging.
The charging process is shown by the
charge indicator on the control display.
The mobile phone to be charged is located
in the center of the tray. The mobile phone
display is pointing upwards.
Safety information
Inserting the mobile phone
1. Open the tray cover.
Warning
2. Place the mobile phone centered in the tray
with the display facing up.
When charging a Qi-compatible device in the
wireless charging tray, any metal objects on
the tray together with the device can become
very hot. If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic strips,
or cards that transmit signals, are placed on
the tray together with the device, they may
3. Close the tray cover.
237
Interior equipment
CONTROLS
▷
If storage media or electronic cards,
e.g., chip cards, cards with magnetic
stripes, or cards for signal transmission,
are located between the mobile phone and
wireless charging tray.
LED displays
Color Meaning
Blue
The mobile phone is charging.
The blue LED stays illuminated once
▷
▷
Due to protective sleeves and covers that
exceed a thickness of 0.07 in/2 mm
the inserted mobile phone with Qi
capability is fully charged.
Due to protective sleeves and covers made
of unsuitable material, e.g., with magnetic
parts.
Or-
The mobile phone is not charging.
ange
Temperature of the mobile phone
may be too high or foreign object
may be in charging tray.
▷
▷
Due to add-on parts for mobile phone, e.g.,
holders.
By settings on the mobile phone, for in-
stance for charging. Follow the relevant in-
structions on the control display and in the
instructions for the mobile phone, if applica-
ble.
Red
The mobile phone is not charging.
Contact an authorized service center
or another qualified service center or
repair shop.
Forgotten warning
General information
A warning can be given if a Qi-certified mobile
phone was forgotten in the wireless charging
tray when leaving the vehicle.
The forgotten warning is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Enable/Disable Forgotten Warning
1.
Apps menu
2. "Vehicle"
3. "System settings"
4. "Wireless charging tray"
5. "Mobile phone reminder"
System limits
The charge current may be reduced or charg-
ing may be temporarily interrupted in the wire-
less charging tray in the following situations:
▷
Due to excessive temperatures on the sur-
face of the tray and mobile phone.
▷
If there are objects between the mobile
phone and the wireless charging tray.
238
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options
Warning
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. Attached objects
could come loose. There is a risk of injury
or risk of damage to property. Do not use
anti-slip pads.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Glove compartment
Safety information
Opening the glove compartment
Warning
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable
such as mobile phones or loose objects can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Se-
cure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
Pull the handle.
Warning
Fold-out compartment
Open flaps of the storage compartments,
e.g., glove compartment or center armrest,
protrude into the interior when folded open
and may be in the way of an airbag that
deploys. In addition, objects in the open stor-
age compartment can be thrown into the ve-
hicle interior during the trip, for instance, in
the event of an accident or when braking or
making an evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury. Always close storage compartments
immediately after use.
Opening the fold-out compartment
Press the button and open the cover.
239
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Storage compartments in
the doors
Front center armrest
General information
A storage compartment is located in the center
armrest between the seats.
General information
There are storage compartments in the doors.
Opening the center armrest
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects such as glass bottles or
glasses can break in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. Bro-
ken glass can be scattered in the car's inte-
rior. There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not use any breakable objects
while driving. Only stow breakable objects in
closed storage compartments.
Press the button.
Closing the center armrest
Press the lid down until it engages.
Storage tray in center
console
Front cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Opening the storage compartment
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not force objects into the
cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and
sealable containers. Clean up spilled liquids
immediately. Do not transport hot beverages.
Press on the cover.
Closing the storage compartment
Pull the cover on the handle back.
240
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
cup holder. Use lightweight, shatterproof, and
sealable containers. Clean up spilled liquids
immediately. Do not transport hot beverages.
Opening the cup holder
NOTICE
With an open cup holder, the center armrest
cannot be folded back up. There is a risk of
damage to property. Press back the covers
before the center armrest is folded up.
Press on the cover.
Opening the cup holder
1. Fold down the center armrest.
Two cup holders are located in the center con-
sole.
2. Press the button to open the cup holder.
Closing the cup holder
Pull the cover on the handle back.
Rear cup holder
Safety information
Warning
Closing the cup holder
Press both covers back inward in sequence
and fold the center armrest back.
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders may
damage the cup holders or be thrown about
the car’s interior in the event of an accident,
an evasive maneuver, or forceful braking.
Spilled liquids can distract from the surround-
ing traffic conditions, lead to an accident and
damage vehicle components. Hot drinks can
damage the cup holder or lead to scalding.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Do not force objects into the
241
Storage compartments
CONTROLS
Coat hooks
General information
The coat hooks are located on the door pillar in
the rear.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the coat hooks can ob-
struct the view while driving. There is a risk of
accident. When suspending clothing articles
from the coat hooks, ensure that they will not
obstruct the driver's view.
Warning
Improper use of the coat hooks can lead to a
risk of objects flying about during braking and
evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury
and risk of damage to property. Only hang
lightweight objects, for instance clothing arti-
cles, from the coat hooks.
242
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options
Warning
Improperly stowed objects can slip and be
thrown into the car's interior, for instance in
the event of an accident, braking or an eva-
sive maneuver. Vehicle occupants can be hit
and injured. There is a risk of injury and risk
of damage to property. Stow and secure ob-
jects and cargo properly.
This chapter describes model-specific equip-
ment, systems, and functions that are currently
available, or may become available in the fu-
ture, even if they are not present in the vehicle.
Additional information:
Vehicle equipment, refer to page 8.
Loading
NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
There is a risk of damage to property. Make
sure that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Safety information
Warning
High gross vehicle weight can overheat the
tires, damage them internally and cause
a sudden tire pressure loss. Driving char-
acteristics may be negatively impacted, re-
ducing directional stability, lengthening the
braking distances and changing the steering
response. There is a risk of accident. Pay
attention to the permitted load-carrying ca-
pacity of the tires and never exceed the per-
mitted gross vehicle weight.
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
the vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs
Warning
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
pacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in the vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - 750 (5 x
150) = 650 lbs)
Devices connected to the vehicle via a cable
such as mobile phones or loose objects can
be thrown through the vehicle interior while
driving such as in the event of an accident,
braking or evasive maneuver. There is a risk
of injury and risk of damage to property. Se-
cure loose objects or devices that are con-
nected to the vehicle via a cable.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely exceed the
243
Cargo area
CONTROLS
available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
of the rear seat backrests. When the rear
seat is not occupied, secure each of the
outer seat belts in the opposite buckle.
6. If the vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to the
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine
how this reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of the vehicle.
Lashing eyes in the cargo
area
Payload
General information
Attach auxiliary materials to secure the cargo
such as lashing straps, tensioning straps, draw
straps, or cargo nets to the lashing eyes.
Overview
The maximum payload is the sum of the
weight of the occupants and the cargo.
The greater the weight of the occupants, the
less cargo that can be transported.
Stowing and securing cargo
The lashing eyes are located in the luggage
compartment.
▷
▷
▷
▷
▷
Cover sharp edges and corners on the
cargo.
Do not stack cargo above the upper edge of
the backrests.
Multifunction hook
If necessary, fold down the rear backrests
to stow large cargo.
General information
Depending on the equipment, a multifunction
hook is located on the left and right side in the
cargo area.
Fasten the aids for securing the load to the
lashing eyes in the cargo area.
Small and light cargo: secure with tension-
ing straps or tension bands or with a lug-
gage compartment net.
Safety information
▷
▷
Larger and heavy cargo: secure with cargo
straps.
Warning
Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as possi-
ble, directly behind and at the bottom of the
rear seat backrests.
Improper use of the multifunction hooks can
lead to a risk of objects flying about, e.g., dur-
ing braking and evasive maneuvers. There
is a risk of injury and risk of damage to
▷
Very heavy cargo: stow as far forward as
possible, directly behind and at the bottom
property. Only hang lightweight objects from
244
Cargo area
CONTROLS
the multifunction hooks. Only transport heavy
luggage in the cargo area if it has been ap-
propriately secured.
Warning
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s
interior; for instance, in the event of an acci-
dent, braking or an evasive maneuver. There
is a risk of injury. Make sure that the rear seat
backrest is locked after folding it back.
Net
Small objects can be stowed in the net on the
left side.
Warning
Through-loading system
The stability of the child restraint system is
limited or compromised with incorrect seat
setting or improper installation of the child
seat. There is a risk of injury or danger to life.
Make sure that the child restraint system fits
securely against the backrest. If possible, ad-
just the backrest tilt for all affected backrests
and correctly adjust the seats. Make sure that
seats and backrests are securely engaged or
locked. If possible and necessary, adjust the
height of the head restraints or remove them.
Principle
The cargo area can be enlarged by folding
down the rear seat backrests.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided at a ratio of
40–20–40. The right rear seat backrest and
the center section can be folded down sepa-
rately. The left rear seat backrest can be folded
down together with the center section.
Folding down the rear seat backrest
The rear seat backrests can be folded down
from the cargo area. The center section can be
separately folded down from the rear.
From the cargo area
Safety information
Warning
Vehicle parts can be damaged or body parts
jammed when folding down the rear seat
backrest. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Make sure that the area
of movement of the rear seat backrest includ-
ing head restraint is clear when folding down.
Pull the corresponding lever in the cargo area
to release the rear seat backrest.
▷
Left lever: fold down the left and middle
rear seat backrest.
▷
Right lever: fold down the right rear seat
backrest.
245
Cargo area
CONTROLS
Folding back the rear seat backrest
Return the rear seat backrest to the seat posi-
tion and engage it.
Folding down middle section
Pull lever and fold the center section forward.
246
Cargo area
CONTROLS
247
